PLEASE LET US KNOW!

Your comments and suggestions will help

us improve this manual!
Please complete and mail this form or FAX
your comments to: (610) 709-3800.
Manual: _______________________________ Publication Number: _______
Vehicle Model: _________________________ Model Year: ______________
Do you find procedures properly organized and easy to follow? 첸 Yes 첸 No
If not, please explain: ______________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Manual page numbers: _____________________________________________
Are there any important procedures or other information presently not in this
manual that you would like to see included? 첸 Yes 첸 No
If yes, please describe: _____________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Did you find any errors in the procedures or illustrations? 첸 Yes 첸 No
If yes, what pages? _______________________________________________
Please explain: ___________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Please include a copy of each page in question and mark your comments and
suggestions.
Name: ________________________________ Phone: (_____) _____-_______
Company: _______________________________________________________
Address: ________________________________________________________
City: _________________________________ State: _______ Zip: _______
Position Title: ____________________________________________________

Thank You For Your Assistance

Mack Trucks, Inc.
(ATTENTION: RTS STAFF, 6S3)

DO NOT STAPLE — USE TRANSPARENT TAPE

 FOLD ALONG THIS LINE • DO NOT STAPLE • USE TRANSPARENT TAPE

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 1602 ALLENTOWN, PA

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SERVICE PUBLICATIONS (RTS), 6S3

MACK TRUCKS INC
WORLD HEADQUARTERS
PO BOX M
ALLENTOWN PA 18105-9972

FOLD ALONG THIS LINE

 V-MAC® III
Support Software
User’s Guide
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

V-MAC® III is a registered trademark of Mack Trucks, Inc.

New — July 2004 ELECTRICAL 8-358

© Copyright 2004, Mack Trucks, Inc.

Page i
 ATTENTION
The information in this manual is not all inclusive and
cannot take into account all unique situations. Note that
some illustrations are typical and may not reflect the
exact arrangement of every component installed on a
specific chassis.
The information, specifications, and illustrations in this
publication are based on information that was current at
the time of publication.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or be transmitted in any form by any
means including (but not limited to) electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise
without prior written permission of Mack Trucks, Inc.

Page ii
SAFETY INFORMATION

SAFETY INFORMATION

Page iii
 SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
Advisory Labels
Cautionary signal words (Danger-Warning-Caution) may appear in various locations throughout this
manual. Information accented by one of these signal words must be observed to minimize the risk of
personal injury to service personnel, or the possibility of improper service methods which may damage
the vehicle or cause it to be unsafe. Additional Notes and Service Hints are used to emphasize areas of
procedural importance and provide suggestions for ease of repair. The following definitions indicate the
use of these advisory labels as they appear throughout the manual:

Activities associated with Danger indicate that death or serious personal

injury may result from failing to heed the advisory. Serious personal injury
may be equated to career-ending injury.

Activities associated with Warning indicate that personal injury may result
from failing to heed the advisory. In this case, personal injury is not equated to
career-ending injury, but results in possible change in quality of life.

Activities associated with Caution indicate that product damage may result from
failing to heed the advisory. Caution is not used for personal injury.

A procedure, practice, or condition that is essential to emphasize.

A helpful suggestion that will make it quicker and/or easier to perform a procedure,
while possibly reducing service cost.

Page iv
 SAFETY INFORMATION
Service Procedures and Tool Usage
Anyone using a service procedure or tool not recommended in this manual must first satisfy himself
thoroughly that neither his safety nor vehicle safety will be jeopardized by the service method he selects.
Individuals deviating in any manner from the instructions provided assume all risks of consequential
personal injury or damage to equipment involved.

Also note that particular service procedures may require the use of a special tool(s) designed for a
specific purpose. These special tools must be used in the manner described, whenever specified in the
instructions.

1. Before starting a vehicle, always be seated in the driver’s seat, place the
transmission in neutral, apply the parking brakes and push in the clutch
pedal.
2. Before working on a vehicle, place the transmission in neutral, set the
parking brakes, and block the wheels.
3. Before towing the vehicle, place the transmission in neutral and lift the
rear wheels off the ground, or disconnect the driveline to avoid damage to
the transmission during towing.

Engine-driven components such as Power Take-Off (PTO) units, fans and fan
belts, driveshafts and other related rotating assemblies, can be very
dangerous. Do not work on or service engine-driven components unless the
engine is shut down. Always keep body parts and loose clothing out of range
of these powerful components to prevent serious personal injury. Be aware of
PTO engagement or nonengagement status. Always disengage the PTO when
not in use.

Do not work under a vehicle that is supported only by a hydraulic jack. The
hydraulic jack could fail suddenly and unexpectedly, resulting in severe
personal injury or death. Always use jackstands of adequate capacity to
support the weight of the vehicle.

REMEMBER,
SAFETY . . . IS NO ACCIDENT!

Page v
 SAFETY INFORMATION
Mack Trucks, Inc. cannot anticipate every 앫 Use hoists or jacks to lift or move heavy
possible occurrence that may involve a potential objects.
hazard. Accidents can be avoided by recognizing
앫 NEVER run engine indoors unless exhaust
potentially hazardous situations and taking
fumes are adequately vented to the outside.
necessary precautions. Performing service
procedures correctly is critical to technician safety 앫 Be aware of hot surfaces. Allow engine to
and safe, reliable vehicle operation. cool sufficiently before performing any
service or tests in the vicinity of the engine.
The following list of general shop safety practices
앫 Keep work area clean and orderly. Clean up
can help technicians avoid potentially hazardous
any spilled oil, grease, fuel, hydraulic fluid,
situations and reduce the risk of personal injury.
etc.
DO NOT perform any services, maintenance
procedures or lubrications until this manual has 앫 Only use tools that are in good condition,
been read and understood. and always use accurately calibrated torque
wrenches to tighten all fasteners to specified
앫 Perform all service work on a flat, level
torques. In instances where procedures
surface. Block wheels to prevent vehicle
require the use of special tools which are
from rolling.
designed for a specific purpose, use only in
앫 DO NOT wear loose-fitting or torn clothing. the manner described in the instructions.
Remove any jewelry before servicing
앫 Do not store natural gas powered vehicles
vehicle.
indoors for an extended period of time
앫 ALWAYS wear safety glasses and protective (overnight) without first removing the fuel.
shoes. Avoid injury by being aware of sharp
앫 Never smoke around a natural gas powered
corners and jagged edges.
vehicle.

Page vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page vii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL Fault Reporter Log Items ................................ 22
Vehicle Information Display Screen ............... 22
INTRODUCTION TO V-MAC® SUPPORT
Programming History Display Screen ............ 23
SOFTWARE ....................................................... 2
Switch Status Display Screen ........................ 23
Software Organization ...................................... 2
Vehicle Data Log Display Screen ................... 23
Online Help Function ...................................... 2
Maintenance Data Log Display Screen .......... 24
Software Distribution ........................................ 2
Enable Predictive Oil Change Message ......... 24
User Guide Organization .................................. 2
Adaptive Cruise Control Screen ..................... 25
V-MAC II User Information ............................. 2
Fault Reporter Configuration Screen .............. 26
Fault Reporter Advanced Setup Screen ......... 26
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Calibrate Throttle Pedal................................... 27
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Chassis Dyno Mode Display Screen .............. 27
INTRODUCTION ................................................ 4 Cylinder Cut-Out Test Display Screen ........... 28
About Installation .............................................. 4 Engine Run-Up Test Screen .......................... 28
Installation Requirements ................................. 4 Engine Compression Test Screen .................. 29
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION Engine Brake Test Screen ............................. 29
AND OPERATION .............................................. 4 Wiggle Wire Test Screen ................................ 30
Installing V-MAC Support Software .................. 4 Cylinder Balance Test .................................... 30
Connecting the Computer to the Vehicle ......... 6 VTG Vane Position Calibration Test ............... 31
Using the Data Link Adapter .......................... 6 Change Idle Speed Entry Form....................... 32
Accessing V-MAC Support Software ............... 6 Cummins Screen Summaries .......................... 32
Using the Mack Software Folder ..................... 6 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS DESCRIPTION AND
Using the Start Menu ...................................... 6 OPERATION ...................................................... 35
Configuring the Software .................................. 7 Active Faults While Monitoring List ............ 35
Software Configuration Fields ........................ 7 Calibrate Throttle Pedal .............................. 35
Exiting V-MAC Support Software ..................... 7 Capturing Display Screen Snapshots ........ 35
Uninstalling V-MAC Software ........................... 7 Changing Engine Idle Speed ..................... 35
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION SPECIAL TOOLS Changing the Governor Type .................... 36
AND EQUIPMENT ............................................. 8 Chassis DYNO Mode ................................ 36
Hardware Requirements .................................. 8 Clearing Current Selections ....................... 36
Communication Interface ................................. 9 Clearing Fault Tables ................................ 36
Serial Link Adapter ......................................... 9 Cylinder Balance Test ................................ 37
Cylinder Cut-Out Test ................................ 37
Default Display Settings ............................ 37
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Engine Brake Test ...................................... 37
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS INTRODUCTION ..... 12 Engine Compression Test .......................... 38
About Service Diagnostics ............................... 12 Engine Run-Up Test ................................... 38
Accessing Service Diagnostics ........................ 12 Fault Monitoring During
Online Help Function ........................................ 12 Live Parameter Monitoring ...................... 38
Additional Information ...................................... 12 Fault Reporter............................................. 38
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS VISUAL Fault Reporter Advanced Setup ................. 39
IDENTIFICATION ............................................... 12 Fault Reporter Configuration ...................... 39
Screen Summaries ........................................... 12 Live Parameter Monitoring ........................ 39
Datalink Connection Message......................... 12 Parameter Selection
Service Diagnostics Menu .............................. 12 Using Default Selections ......................... 39
Utilities Menu .................................................. 13 Using SAE Parameter Menu ................... 39
Preferences Entry Form .................................. 14 Paused Parameter Monitoring ................... 40
SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen ........ 15 Predictive Oil Change ................................. 40
Fault Codes Menu .......................................... 17 Printing Display Screen Snapshots ........... 40
Diagnostic Tools Menu ................................... 17 Printing Fault Tables .................................. 40
Special Diagnostic Modes Menu .................... 18 Resetting the Maintenance Data Log ........ 41
Parameter Monitoring Display Screens .......... 19 Resetting the Vehicle Data Log ................. 41
All Active Faults Display Screen ..................... 19 Saving Default Selections .......................... 41
Controller Fault Table Display Screen ............ 20 Saving Parameter Defaults ........................ 41
Fault Reporter Screen .................................... 20 Saving the Maintenance Data Log ............ 41
Clearing Fault Reporter .................................. 21 Saving the Vehicle Data Log ..................... 41

Page viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Selecting Datalink Adapter.......................... 41 Maintenance Customer Defined Labels
VTG Vane Position Calibration ................... 42 Entry Form .................................................... 65
Viewing Active Faults ................................. 42 Driver ID Settings Entry Form ......................... 66
Viewing Adaptive Cruise Control Status .... 42 Cummins Screen Summaries ........................... 66
Viewing Display Screen Snapshots ........... 43 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Viewing Electronic Configuration DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .................... 68
Information ............................................... 43 Theft Deterrence System Summary ................. 68
Viewing Fault Tables .................................. 43 Security Modes ............................................... 68
Viewing Programming Histories ................. 43 Access Level Restrictions ............................... 68
Viewing the Maintenance Data Log ........... 43 Maintenance Monitor Summary ........................ 68
Viewing the Switch Status Display ............. 44 Programming Maintenance Intervals .............. 69
Viewing the Vehicle Data Log .................... 44 Monitoring Maintenance Thresholds ............... 69
Wiggle Wire Test......................................... 45 Broadcasting Maintenance Alerts ................... 69
DataMax™ Summary Information .................... 47 Customer Data Programming Functions.......... 70
Edit Owner Storage .................................... 70
Maintenance Monitor Schedule .................. 70
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING Unit Pump Calibration ................................. 70
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING Set Time and Date ..................................... 70
INTRODUCTION ................................................ 52 Print Current Parameters ........................... 70
About Customer Data Programming ................ 52 View Current Parameters ........................... 70
Accessing Customer Data Programming .......... 52 Utilities......................................................... 70
Online Help Function ........................................ 52 Vehicle Component Parameters ....................... 71
Additional Information ....................................... 52 Unit ID Number .......................................... 71
Password Protection ......................................... 52 Transmission Top Gear Ratio .................... 71
Entering the Password .................................... 52 Carrier Ratio ............................................... 71
Changing the Password .................................. 53 Tire Size ..................................................... 71
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING VISUAL Road Speed Pickup Teeth ......................... 71
IDENTIFICATION ............................................... 53 Road Speed Limit ....................................... 71
Screen Summaries ........................................... 53 Lower Gear Road Speed Limit ................... 72
Customer Data Programming Menu ............... 53 Engine Load Threshold for No
View/Print Report Selection Screen ................ 54 MPH Signal .............................................. 72
Program Vehicle Component Parameters Failed MPH Sensor Engine
Entry Form .................................................... 55 Power Limit .............................................. 72
Vehicle ECU Customer Data Menu ................ 55 Battery Low Voltage Fault Threshold ......... 72
Engine ECU Customer Data Entry Form ........ 56 Alternator Low Voltage Fault Threshold ..... 72
Fleet Data Menu ............................................. 56 Alternator High Voltage Fault Threshold .... 73
Edit Owner Storage Entry Form ...................... 57 Engine Brake Engagement Delay in
Maintenance Monitor Entry Form .................... 57 Cruise........................................................ 73
Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form .................. 60 Engine Brake Disengagement in
Set Time and Date Screen .............................. 60 Cruise........................................................ 73
General Features Entry Form ......................... 61 Enable Cruise Button Bonus ...................... 73
Shutdown Options Entry Form ........................ 61 Detect Loss of Signal from
Vocational Features Entry Form ..................... 61 MPH Sensor ............................................. 73
Cab Fan Controls Entry Form ......................... 62 Limit Power if No Signal from
Cruise Control Options Entry Form ................. 62 MPH Sensor ............................................. 74
Electronic Hand Throttle Settings Limit Power if Electrical Fault from
Entry Form .................................................... 62 MPH Sensor ............................................. 74
PTO Speed Control Settings Entry Form ........ 63 Customer Torque Limit................................ 74
PTO 1-2 Custom Settings Entry Form ............ 63 Customer Torque Limit Gear Ratio ............. 74
PTO 3-4 Custom Settings Entry Form ............ 63 Torque Limit Ramp-Up Time....................... 74
Theft Deterrence Parameters Entry Form ....... 64 Enable Torque Limit with PTO .................... 74
Fleet Display and Trip Parameters Enable if Fault Incorrect Gear Ratio............ 75
Entry Form .................................................... 64 Incentive Increase in RSL ........................... 75
Fleet Driver Event Settings Entry Form .......... 65 Penalty Decrease in RSL ............................ 75
Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings Speed Limit Adjustment Rate...................... 76
Entry Form .................................................... 65

Page ix
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING (CONTINUED)
Customer Data/VECU Set/Resume Fault Diagnostic ..................... 85
General Features .......................................... 76 Switch Assignments .................................. 85
Lower Gear Road Speed Limit Option ....... 76 Cab Fan Controls ......................................... 86
Delay Engine Brake Application Allow Fan Override When Moving ............. 86
in Cruise .................................................. 76 Fan Override Time When Moving .............. 86
Low Idle Speed Adjust with Switches ........ 76 Allow Fan Override When Parked ............. 86
Hold Electrical Power ON Until Engage Fan with Engine Brake ................. 86
Vehicle Stopped ...................................... 76 Engage Fan with PTO ON .......................... 87
Enable Sleep Mode Alert ........................... 77 Cruise Control Features ................................ 87
Enable Air Suspension Speed Interlock ..... 77 Cruise Control Mode................................... 87
Air Suspension Polarity .............................. 77 Disable Cruise Control................................ 87
Air Suspension Active Dashboard Autoresume with Clutch.............................. 87
Alert .......................................................... 77 Accel Bump Speed .................................... 87
RSL When Air Suspension Active .............. 77 Decel Bump Speed .................................... 88
Fuel Economy Type ................................... 78 Hold to Nearest .......................................... 88
Cruise Switch Disables Super 10 Cruise Min Road Speed ............................ 88
Top 2 ....................................................... 78 Cruise Max Road Speed ........................... 88
Engine Overspeed Fault Threshold ........... 78 Bump Speed .............................................. 88
Service Brake Fault Threshold with Incentive Increase in Cruise Max Speed .... 89
Engine Brake ........................................... 78 Penalty Decrease in Cruise Max Speed ..... 89
Shutdown Options .......................................... 79 Engagement and Dropout Requirements .. 90
Coolant Temperature ................................. 79 Electronic Hand Throttle (EHT) Features ...... 90
Oil Pressure ............................................... 79 Enable Custom EHT Control ..................... 90
Coolant Level ............................................. 79 Autoset ...................................................... 90
Automatic Transmission Temperature Jump to Min Speed .................................... 90
Warning and Shutdown ........................... 79 Single Speed Control (SSC) ...................... 90
Transmission Temperature ........................ 80 Hold to Minimum Speed ............................ 91
Exhaust Temperature ................................ 80 Dropout Above Maximum Speed ............... 91
Idle Cooldown Feature Enabled ................. 80 Electronic Hand Throttle SSC RPM ........... 91
Idle Shutdown ............................................. 80 Accel Bump Speed .................................... 91
Idle Shutdown if PTO Active ...................... 81 Decel Bump Speed .................................... 91
Idle Shutdown if Single Speed Control Hold to Nearest .......................................... 91
Active ....................................................... 81 Accel Ramp Rate ....................................... 92
Idle Shutdown if % Load Used Higher Decel Ramp Rate ...................................... 92
Than Threshold ....................................... 81 Min Set Speed ........................................... 92
Idle Shutdown if Hand Throttle Control Max Set Speed .......................................... 92
Active ....................................................... 81 Engine Speed Limit ................................... 92
Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode .............. 81 Max Road Speed ....................................... 92
Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode with Ramp Rate ................................................ 93
PTO 4 Fast Idle ....................................... 82 Engagement and Dropout
Ambient Air Temperature Option ................ 82 Requirements .......................................... 93
Minimum Ambient Air Temperature ............ 83 PTO Speed Control Settings ......................... 93
Maximum Ambient Air Temperature ........... 83 Single Speed Control (SSC) ...................... 93
Idle Shutdown Timer .................................. 83 Park Brake Check to Enable PTO ............. 93
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer ................. 83 Min Set Speed ........................................... 94
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Temperature ...... 83 Max Set Speed .......................................... 94
Idle Shutdown Warning Time .................... 84 Max Road Speed Dropout .......................... 94
Idle Shutdown % Load Threshold .............. 84 Engine Speed Limit ................................... 94
Vocational Features ...................................... 84 Preset Speed ............................................. 94
Set/Resume Switch State .......................... 84 Ramp Rate ................................................ 94
Inhibit Cruise Control with PTO ON ........... 84 Road Speed Limit ....................................... 95
Single Press of Resume to Accelerate ...... 84 Custom PTO Settings .................................... 95
Initial Set using Resume Switch ................ 85 Autoset ...................................................... 95
Driveshaft PTO 2 Option ............................ 85 Jump to Minimum Speed ........................... 95

Page x
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hold to Minimum Speed ............................. 96 Reset Driver Trip via V.I.P.™ ..................... 106
Dropout Above Maximum Speed ............... 96 Display Trip Information on V.I.P.™ ........... 106
Accel Bump Speed ..................................... 96 Enable Sweet Spot Indicator on V.I.P.™ .... 106
Enable Custom PTO ................................... 96 Programming Options via V.I.P.™ .............. 107
Decel Bump Speed .................................... 96 Reset Predictive Oil Change via
Hold to Nearest .......................................... 97 Override Switch......................................... 109
Accel Ramp Rate ....................................... 97 GuardDog™ Enabled.................................. 110
Decel Ramp Rate ....................................... 97 GuardDog™ Low Fuel Level Warn.
Engagement and Dropout Thresh. % ................................................. 110
Requirements ........................................... 98 Fleet Fuel Economy Target ........................ 110
Customer Data/EECU Features ....................... 99 Driver Incentive ........................................... 111
High Idle Engine Speed ............................. 99 Incentive-to-Base Hysteresis ...................... 112
Coolant Temperature Fan Engagement Fleet Fuel Economy Penalty Threshold ...... 112
Threshold ................................................. 99 Penalty-to-Base Hysteresis......................... 112
Air Temp. Fan Engagement Threshold ...... 99 Incentive/Penalty Fuel Economy
Air Conditioning Override Time .................. 99 Sample Size.............................................. 113
Engine Sleep Mode .................................... 99 Data Save Mode ........................................ 113
Smart Fan Type Installed ............................ 100 Idle Data Type on V.I.P.™ ......................... 113
Driveshaft PTO Dropout Enabled ............... 100 Request Driver Name at Every
Driveshaft PTO Dropout Threshold ............ 100 Startup? ................................................... 113
Fuel Temperature Sensor Applied ............. 100 Source of Driver Name for Trip .................. 113
Oil Level Sensor Available ......................... 100 Length of Driver Trip Code ......................... 114
Output Boost Pressure on J1587 ............... 100 Maintenance Broadcast Schedule ............. 114
Engine Brake Installed ............................... 101 Blackout Mode Enabled ............................. 114
MACK PowerLeash™ Engine Brake Alert Blackout Start Time ........................... 114
Installed..................................................... 101 Alert Blackout Stop Time ............................ 114
Exhaust Brake Installed ............................. 101 Engine Overspeed, Company Limit ........... 114
Oil Temperature Sensor Available ............. 101 Engine Overspeed Logging (Severe) ......... 115
Allow Fan Override When Moving............... 101 Engine Overspeed Logging with Fuel ........ 115
Fan Override Time When Moving ............... 101 Vehicle Overspeed Logging with Fuel ........ 115
Allow Fan Override When Parked............... 102 Vehicle Overspeed Logging,
Air Conditioning Installed Option................. 102 All Conditions ........................................... 115
Fuel Calibration .......................................... 103 Idle Logging Delay ..................................... 115
Fleet Data Hard Braking Threshold ............................. 115
Theft Deterrence Features ............................. 103 Traction Loss Threshold ............................. 115
Number of ID Attempts ............................... 103 Custom Parameters ................................... 116
Demand Driver ID to Operate .................... 103 Driver Event Settings ..................................... 116
Limited Power: % Power Limit if No ID Write Report Once per Day ........................ 116
Entered .................................................... 103 Write Report When Key Turned ON ........... 116
Demand ID to Continue Running Beyond Write Report at Next Trip/Trip Reset .......... 116
30 Seconds .............................................. 104 Write Report at Next Driver ......................... 116
Limited Time: % Power Limit Before Driver Event Summary Time ...................... 116
Shutdown ................................................. 104 Trigger: PTO 1 Engaged ............................ 117
Distance Before Shutdown ......................... 104 Trigger: PTO 2 Engaged ............................ 117
Distance Remaining After Shutdown Trigger: Fueled Engine Speed ................... 117
Lamp ON................................................... 104 Trigger: Severe Engine Speed ................... 117
Time Before Shutdown ............................... 104 Trigger: Company Limit Engine Speed ...... 117
% Mechanic Power Limit ............................ 104 Trigger: Fueled Vehicle Overspeed ........... 117
Mechanic Road Speed Limit ...................... 105 Trigger: Vehicle Overspeed, All
Display and Trip Settings ............................... 105 Conditions ................................................ 118
Vehicle Display Type .................................. 105 Driver Event Summary List ........................ 118
Advance to Next Trip via Display ............... 105 Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings ......... 118
Reset DataMax™ via V.I.P.™ .................... 105 Customer Defined Labels .............................. 120
Driver Reset Maintenance Driver ID Settings ........................................... 120
Items via V.I.P.™ ..................................... 106 Determining Actual Fuel Consumed ............... 121

Page xi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEALER PROGRAMMING REVIEW DEALER PROGRAMMING
PHASES ............................................................. 144
Introduction ...................................................... 124
Product Software Programming ....................... 144
Accessing Dealer Programming Software ...... 124
Data File Programming .................................... 144
Online Help Function ...................................... 124
PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER ........................... 145
Additional Information ..................................... 124
Step 1 — Configure PC..................................... 145
DEALER GENERAL PROGRAMMING
Step 2 — Find Vehicle Information
INFORMATION .................................................. 124
(for VECU) ...................................................... 145
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) .......................... 124
Step 3 — Save Customer Data (for VECU) ..... 145
V-MAC III Configuration ................................... 124
Step 4 — Download Product Software File
V-MAC II Configuration .................................... 125
(for VECU) ...................................................... 145
Dealer Programming File Nomenclature .......... 126
Step 5 — Download Datafile (for VECU) ......... 146
The Data File Extension ................................. 126
Step 6 — Program (Flash) VECU .................... 146
V-MAC Dealer Programming Phases .............. 127
Step 7 — Program VECU ................................ 147
Product Software Programming (PSP) ........... 127
Step 8 — Upload Verification File .................... 147
Data File Programming (MDP) ....................... 127
Step 9 — View MACK Host Vehicle Information
DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Screen ............................................................ 148
COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS ......................... 128
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ................... 149
DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Overview of Basic Programming Steps ............ 149
VISUAL IDENTIFICATION ................................. 128
Step 1 — Determining the Programming
Dealer Programming Software Screen
Type ............................................................. 149
Summaries ..................................................... 128
Step 2 — Identifying the Appropriate
V-MAC Dealer Programming Menu ................ 128
Worksheet .................................................... 150
V-MAC Navigator Bar ..................................... 129
Step 3 — Performing Programming
Programming Bar ........................................... 129
Procedures ................................................... 151
Utilities Bar ..................................................... 130
Detailed Programming Instructions .................. 152
Preferences Entry Form ................................. 130
Removing Fuses ............................................ 152
Save Customer Data Entry Form ................... 133
Clearing Fault Tables ..................................... 152
Flash V-MAC III Software Entry Form ............ 133
Saving Customer Data ................................... 152
Flash V.I.P.™ Flash Software
Re-Entering Customer Passwords ................. 152
Entry Form ................................................... 134
Programming the Reprogramming Data File .. 152
Program V-MAC III OEM Data Entry Form .... 134
Changing the ECU Part Number .................... 153
V-MAC Online Screen Summaries ................... 135
Using the F3 Update Options Screen ............. 153
MACKnet LOG ON SCREEN ......................... 136
Downloading the Product Software File ......... 154
V-MAC Online Main Screen ........................... 136
Downloading the Reprogramming
Mack Trucks Host Menu ................................. 136
Data File ......................................................... 154
F1 — Administrative/customer Information
Uploading the Verification File ........................ 154
by GSO/Chassis or VIN Entry Form ............. 137
Downloading the Product Software
F3 — Update Options Form ........................... 137
V.I.P.™ File .................................................... 154
F5 — Update Calibration Codes
Recalibrating the EUPs .................................. 155
Entry Form ................................................... 138
Flashing the Product Software File ................ 155
F9 — EECU Part Number Change
Programming Worksheets ................................ 156
Entry Form ................................................... 140
F11 — VECU Part Number Change
Entry Form ................................................... 140 GLOSSARY ................................................... 169
F19 — Add VIN/GSO/Chassis Entry Form ..... 141
TECHNICAL TERMINOLOGY ........................... 170
F20 — Install Engine Entry Form ................... 141
Software Terminology ...................................... 170
Software Download Entry Form ..................... 142
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................. 170
Datafile Download Entry Form ....................... 142
Verification Upload Entry Form ...................... 143
Using V-MAC Online and Dealer FEATURE INDEX ........................................ 171
Programming .................................................... 144

Page xii
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Page 1
 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION TO V-MAC® User Guide Organization
SUPPORT SOFTWARE The SOFTWARE INSTALLATION section guides
the user through installation of both applications
Software Organization and provides information concerning hardware
requirements, vehicle connections and software
This version of V-MAC support software is made configurations. This section also provides
up of two separate applications. accessing instructions.
앫 Service Support Software consists of two
programs: The SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS section provides
screen summaries, feature descriptions and
— SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS programming information for the SERVICE
— CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING DIAGNOSTICS program.
앫 Dealer Programming Software consists of The CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING section
one program (DEALER PROGRAMMING) provides screen summaries, feature descriptions
that incorporates all functions contained in and programming information for the FLEET
DATA PROGRAMMING and PRODUCT DATA and CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING. program.

The DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

section provides screen summaries and
These two applications (Service Support programming information for the DEALER
Software and Dealer Programming Software) are PROGRAMMING program and V-MAC Online
available by software download from the MACK web-based software, as well as programming
Extranet and as a single CD-ROM that must be instructions and worksheets for reprogramming
set up in two different directories. and reflashing the Electronic Control Units
(ECUs) and the Vehicle Information Profiler
(V.I.P.™), version 4.0.
ONLINE HELP FUNCTION
The GLOSSARY section provides definitions for
Each of the V-MAC support software programs is commonly used V-MAC terms and abbreviations.
now equipped with an online help function
(similar to Windows Help), which provides all of The FEATURE INDEX section provides a
the information contained in this user guide. comprehensive index of V-MAC features.
Simply press F1 to access online help.
Two feature location flow charts are located at the
Software Distribution back of this book.
앫 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS features for
The customer edition of V-MAC support software Step 2 and above are outlined in 8-358-1.
contains the Service Support Software
application only, whereas the dealer edition 앫 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
includes both the Service Support Software and features for Step 2 and above are outlined in
the Dealer Programming Software applications. 8-358-2.

V-MAC II USER INFORMATION

Although the V-MAC support software covers
both V-MAC II and III systems, this user guide is
designed to support V-MAC III. However, user
information for V-MAC II is provided via online
help and through the V-MAC II User Guide
(8-302).

Page 2
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

Page 3
 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
About Installation
Installation of V-MAC support software consists of Installing V-MAC Support Software
installing both Service Support Software and To install the V-MAC support software (CD-ROM)
Dealer Programming Software. Because the on a CD-ROM drive, use the following procedure:
installation procedure is similar for both
applications, only the Service Support Software 1. Insert CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive
installation will be described. (usually drive D:\).
2. Review the “Readme.txt” for further
The installation programs were designed to install installation instructions.
V-MAC support software on a Windows® 2000 1
Professional, XP Professional or higher
computer.

V-MAC support software cannot run directly from

the program CD-ROM provided by Mack Trucks,
Inc., and therefore, MUST be installed on the
hard drive. The original program CD-ROM should
be saved as a backup copy of the software.

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS, CUSTOMER DATA

PROGRAMMING and DEALER
PROGRAMMING are designed to run individually
Figure 1 — Setup Screen
and cannot be run at the same time.
3. At the Setup status screen, click on the
Next button.
Installation Requirements 4. At the License Agreement screen, page
Before installing this software, be sure that the down to read the Service Support Software
minimum hardware requirements are met. (Refer License Agreement. Click on the Yes button
to “Hardware Requirements” on page 8.) to accept the agreement or click on the No
button to reject the agreement and close the
setup.

To install V-MAC III Service Tools, you must

accept this agreement.

Page 4
 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
2 4

Figure 2 — License Agreement Screen Figure 4 — Copy Files

5. At the Choose Destination Folder screen, The computer will begin copying the files.
click on the Next button to use the MACK
recommended destination folder or click on
the Browse button to select another folder
destination. The system may ask you to view the Service Text.
3
It is recommended that you do because the
Service Text may contain special installation
notes and other important information.

7. When installation is complete, click on the

Finish button.
Repeat the process to install Dealer
Programming.
5

Figure 3 — Choose Destination Folder

Mack Trucks, Inc. does not recommend changing

the destination folder.

6. If all of the settings are correct, click on the

Next button to continue. Figure 5 — Installation Complete

Remember to remove the CD-ROM from the

drive and store properly.

Page 5
 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Connecting the Computer to the Accessing V-MAC Support Software
Vehicle Always remember to connect the interface and
To use V-MAC support software, the computer turn the ignition key to the ON position before
must be connected to the vehicle using a accessing V-MAC support software.
communication interface (RP1210A-compliant
serial link adapter). Refer to “Communication This software includes three separate programs:
Interface” on page 9 for communication interface 앫 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
information.
앫 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

USING THE DATALINK ADAPTER 앫 DEALER PROGRAMMING

To connect the datalink adapter: Two methods can be used to access V-MAC
1. Turn the computer on and let it boot (start) support software:
completely. 앫 MACK Software folder
2. Connect the datalink adapter end to the 앫 Start Menu
associated communication port on the
computer.
USING THE MACK SOFTWARE FOLDER
Depending on the configuration of the
computer, it may be necessary to use an 1. Double-click on the MACK software folder
adapter or gender changer. Adapters and located on the PC’s desktop.
gender changers are readily available at 2. Double-click on the desired application to
most electronic supply stores. run.
3. Connect the J1708 connector of the
RP1210A-compliant data link adapter to the USING THE START MENU
serial communications port on the vehicle
(located under the dash to the left of the 1. Click on the Start button.
steering column). 2. Select Programs.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Select Mack Software.
To disconnect the datalink adapter: 4. Select the desired program.
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the J1708 connector of the
RP1210A-compliant datalink adapter from
the serial communications port on the
vehicle.
3. Disconnect the datalink adapter end of the
RP1210A-compliant datalink adapter from
the serial port on the computer (remove any
adapters or gender changers).
4. Turn the computer off.

Page 6
 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Configuring the Software Exiting V-MAC Support Software
Before using V-MAC support software, it must be
properly configured.

To configure the Service Support Software: Always exit V-MAC support software before
turning off the computer.
1. Start either SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS or
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING. For
Service Diagnostics, click on the Utilities There are three ways to exit V-MAC support
button and then the Preferences button. For software:
Customer Data Programming, click on the
앫 Click on the Quit button (from the main
Preferences button.
menu).
2. Select Preferences.
앫 Select File and then Exit (for Dealer
3. Choose settings for each of the fields (refer Programming).
to the “SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
앫 Click on the X in the top right corner of the
FIELDS” on page 7).
screen at any time.
4. Click on the OK button.

To configure the Dealer Programming Software:

1. Start DEALER PROGRAMMING and click Always cycle the key switch after exiting
on the Utilities tab. CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING.
2. Select Preferences.
3. Choose settings for each of the fields (refer Uninstalling V-MAC Software
to the “SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
FIELDS” on page 7). To access the Uninstall program, use the
following steps:
4. Click on the OK button.
1. Click on the Start button.
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION FIELDS 2. Select Settings.
Communications Port — Most systems will use 3. Select Control Panel.
COM 1 as the communications port. 4. Select Add/Remove Programs.
RP1210A Device Name — Most systems will 5. Select the appropriate file.
use J1708 as the protocol. 6. Click on the Add/Remove button.
International Unit Type — Set to either metric or For assistance with installing or uninstalling
English display units. V-MAC support software, please contact the
Mack Trucks, Inc. Systems Support Center
Language — At this time, only English is (800-247-0039). Hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
available. (Eastern time), Monday through Friday.

Page 7
 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION FOR NOTEBOOK PC:
SPECIAL TOOLS AND Processor — Pentium III, 500 MHz Minimum;
EQUIPMENT 1.0 GHz or faster preferred

Hardware Requirements Operating System — Microsoft® Windows 2000

Professional or XP Professional
If you are planning to purchase a new desktop
PC, this is the current recommended minimum RAM — 128 MB minimum; 256 MB preferred
configuration. Although PCs with lesser
configuration may run MACK applications, this is Hard Drive — 10 GB minimum; 40 GB preferred
the minimum configuration recommended for new
purchases: RS-232 Serial Communications Port —
16550 UART equipped DB9 9-pin serial port
FOR DESKTOP: (mandatory)

Processor — Pentium III, 500 MHz Minimum; Removable or Other (Storage) Media —
1.0 GHz or faster preferred Swappable CD-ROM/Floppy disk drive

Operating System — Microsoft® Windows 2000 PCMCIA Slots — 2

Professional or XP Professional
Display — 14.1″, active color
RAM — 128 MB minimum; 256 MB preferred
Parallel or USB Port — Recommended for
Hard Drive — 10 GB minimum; 40 GB preferred printer

RS-232 Serial Communications Port — V-MAC® Datalink Adapter —

16550 UART equipped DB9 9-pin serial port RP1210A-compliant datalink adapter
(mandatory)

Input Devices — Mouse or other pointing device

Removable or Other (Storage) Media —

CD-ROM drive 24X or faster minimum;
3.5″ floppy disk drive recommended

Display — SVGA Color (1024 X 768)

101 KEY Keyboard

Parallel or USB Port — Recommended for

printer

V-MAC® Datalink Adapter —

RP1210A-compliant datalink adapter

Page 8
 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Communication Interface
The V-MAC support software can be used with a
serial link adapter. V-MAC support software is not compatible with
Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs) such as
PalmPilot™* software. Therefore, ensure that
SERIAL LINK ADAPTER your PDA synchronization software is not running
The MACK data serial link adapters endorsed as when using the V-MAC software. To do otherwise
certified and recommended for use with the may cause interference in reading the COM port.
V-MAC support software include the Kent-Moore Or, you can choose another computer to use
J 38351-D and the RP1210A-compliant J 45537 PDAs.
PLC adapter model. * PalmPilot™ is a trademark of the 3 Com
6
Corporation.

Figure 6 — Serial Link Adapter

7

Figure 7 — RP1210A-Compliant Adapter, J 45537

J 38351, J 38351-A, J 38351-B and J 38351-C

cannot be used as the communication interface
for the V-MAC support software.

Page 9
 NOTES

Page 10
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Page 11
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION VISUAL IDENTIFICATION
Refer to Service Diagnostics for Windows
About Service Diagnostics (Version 2.8) Feature Location Flow Chart for
The V-MAC system offers a variety of diagnostic V-MAC III, Step 2 and higher (8-358-1) for an
tools and modes which can be accessed using overview of Service Diagnostics features and
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS. functions.

Although this version of SERVICE Screen Summaries

DIAGNOSTICS can be used with both V-MAC II
and V-MAC III systems, the instructions contained Whenever Service Diagnostics (or Customer
in this manual were designed to support Data Programming) is launched, a pop-up screen
V-MAC III. For V-MAC II user information, refer to will appear displaying the type of datalink
the online help and the V-MAC II User Guide connection being used. Below is an example of
(8-302). the RP1210A connection. Click on the OK button
to acknowledge the message. The Service
Diagnostics Main Menu will appear (please refer
Accessing Service Diagnostics to “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS MENU” on page 12
There are two ways to access SERVICE for more information).
8
DIAGNOSTICS:
앫 If there is a Mack Software folder on the
desktop, double-click on the folder. Then
select the SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS icon.
앫 If there is no icon on the desktop, access the
start menu, select Programs and select
Mack Programs. Then select Service
Diagnostics.

Online Help Function Figure 8 — Datalink Connection Message (Using

RP1210A Connection)
This version of V-MAC support software features
an online help function (similar to Windows Help).
The online help includes all of the information
contained in this user guide. Simply press F1 to
If a different datalink adapter is desired, please
view the help topics.
refer to the “UTILITIES MENU” on page 13 for
instructions.
Additional Information
The current V-MAC III Service Manual, 8-211, SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS MENU
provides a complete description of the operation
of the V-MAC III system, as well as instructions The Service Diagnostics Menu presents the
for performing diagnostics and repairs of system available Service Diagnostics portion of the
components. V-MAC Support Software. From this menu, you
can access the following screens: Monitor
For additional assistance, please contact the Parameters, Fault Codes, Diagnostics, Special
Mack Trucks, Inc. System Support Center at Diagnostic Modes and Utilities.
(800) 247-0039. Hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
(Eastern time), Monday through Friday.

Page 12
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
UTILITIES MENU
9

The Utilities Menu allows you to modify several

functions which affect the way the program
operates when performing operations from other
parts of the program.
10

Figure 9 — Service Diagnostics Main Menu

Click on the Monitor Parameters button to use

the parameter monitoring capabilities (refer to the
“SAE PARAMETER MENU SELECTION
SCREEN” on page 15).
Figure 10 — Utilities Menu
Click on the Fault Codes button to view and clear
faults (refer to “FAULT CODES MENU” on page Click on the Display Parameter Snapshot(s)
17). button to select a snapshot to be displayed.

Click on the Diagnostics button to use the Click on the Print Parameter Snapshot(s) button
V-MAC system’s diagnostic tools (refer to to select a snapshot to be printed.
“DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU” on page 17).
Click on the Preferences button to access the
Click on the Special Diagnostic Modes button to current configuration settings (please refer to
use the special diagnostic modes (refer to “PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM” on page 14 for
“SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODES MENU” on instruction).
page 18).
Click on the Back button to return to the Service
Click on the Utilities button to customize the Diagnostic menu.
Service Diagnostics configuration (refer to
“UTILITIES MENU” on page 13).

Click on the Quit button to exit the program.

Page 13
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM Click on the Common tab.
The Preferences entry form, selected from the
To modify the RP1210A-compliant adapter type
Utilities Menu screen, consists of three viewable
selection, do the following:
forms: Common, Service Software and Dealer
Programming. When using Service Diagnostics 1. Click on the RP1210A Device Name radio
or Customer Data Programming, the Common button.
entry form is used. For information on using the
2. Click on the Device Name drop-down arrow
Preferences entry form with Dealer Programming,
and select the adapter desired.
please refer to “PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM”
on page 130. 3. Click on the Port drop-down arrow and
11
select the com port desired.
4. Click on the Protocol drop-down arrow and
select the protocol type desired (protocol
1708 is recommended).
5. Click on the Apply button to save the
change.
6. Click on the OK button to save changes.

Do not use the “Mack Default” selection as your

adapter type.

To modify the Units of Measure, click on the

Figure 11 — Preferences Common Entry Form
International Units drop-down arrow and select
from English, Imperial English or Metric. Click on
The primary function of the Common entry form the Apply button to save the change.
is to select the datalink adapter type and to select
the units of measure.

In order to use an RP1210A-compliant adapter,

the associated driver software must be installed
prior to selecting the adapter type. Please refer to
the documentation that came with your datalink
adapter for instructions.

Page 14
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
SAE PARAMETER MENU SELECTION Click on the Default Selections button to select
SCREEN the default parameters.
The SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen
Click on the Save as Default button to save the
allows you to choose which of the parameters you
current selections as the default. Note that there
want displayed during a monitoring session. Up to
can only be one set of default parameters.
30 items may be selected for Standard Display
and an additional 7 items may be selected for
Click on the Clear Selections button to clear the
Advanced Display. You can also change the
current parameter selections.
default list of parameters from this submenu.
12
Click on the Next button to begin parameter
monitoring with the current selections (refer to
“PARAMETER MONITORING DISPLAY
SCREENS” on page 19).

Click on the Main Menu button to return to the

Service Diagnostics menu.

Below is a table containing the available items in

the SAE Parameter Menu Selection screen.

Figure 12 — SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen

13

Figure 13 — SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen (for

ASET™ AC Engines Only)

Page 15
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
SAE PARAMETER MENU SELECTIONS
Maximum Road Speed Limit Front Rear Axle Temperature
Road Speed Rear Rear Axle Temperature
Cruise Control High Set Limit Speed Cab Interior Temperature
Cruise Control Low Set Limit Speed Ambient Air Temperature
Total Idle Hours Exhaust Gas Temperature
Total Vehicle Hours Transmission Oil Temperature
Total PTO Hours Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Total Engine Hours Fuel Economy
Percent Engine Load (Pwr/Torq) Trip Distance
Coolant Level Total Vehicle Distance
Percent Accelerator Pedal Position Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Level Boost Pressure
Fuel Level Rated Engine Power
Idle Engine Speed Fuel Rate
Rated Engine Speed Service Brake Status
Engine Speed Engine Retarder Status
Trip Fuel Parking Brake Status
Total Idle Fuel Used Road Speed Limit Status
Total Fuel Used Total Engine Revs (x1000)
Engine Module Battery Voltage Clock
Voltage (at V-MAC module) Date
Inlet Manifold Air Temperature PTO 1 Road Speed Limit
Engine Coolant Temperature PTO 2 Road Speed Limit
Fuel Temperature PTO 3 Road Speed Limit
Engine Oil Temperature PTO 4 Road Speed Limit

Page 16
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT CODES MENU
15

The Fault Codes Menu allows you to view and

clear faults. From this submenu, you can enter
the All Active Faults screen, Controller Fault Table
and choose the controller type.
14

Figure 15 — Diagnostic Tools Menu

Click on the Vehicle Information button to view

the Vehicle Information display screen (refer to
“VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY SCREEN”
on page 22).
Figure 14 — Fault Codes Menu
Click on the Programming History button to
Click on the All Active Faults button to view the view the programming history for each ECU (refer
Active Faults display screen (refer to “ALL to “PROGRAMMING HISTORY DISPLAY
ACTIVE FAULTS DISPLAY SCREEN” on page SCREEN” on page 23).
19).
Click on the Switch Status Display button to
Select a desired controller — click on the view the current status of a variety of switches
appropriate radio button — to view under the (refer to “SWITCH STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN”
Choose Controller area of the screen. on page 23).
Then, click on the Controller Fault Table button Click on the Vehicle Data Log Display button to
to view the specified controller of the Fault Table view the Vehicle Data Log (refer to “VEHICLE
display screen (refer to “CONTROLLER FAULT DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN” on page 23).
TABLE DISPLAY SCREEN” on page 20).
Click on the Maintenance Data Log Display
Click on the Back button to return to the Service button to view the Maintenance Data Log (refer to
Diagnostics menu. “MAINTENANCE DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN”
on page 24).
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU
Click on the Adaptive Cruise Control Status
The Diagnostic Tools Menu contains the following button to view the current status of faults in
seven screens: Vehicle Information, SmartCruise (refer to “ADAPTIVE CRUISE
Programming History, Switch Status Display, CONTROL SCREEN” on page 25).
Vehicle Data Log Display, Maintenance Data Log
Display, Adaptive Cruise Control Status, Fault Click on the Configure Fault Reporter button to
Reporter Configuration, and Calibrate Throttle set the Fault Reporter to run under Occurrence
Pedal. Each screen contains functions to aid in Mode or History Mode and to select what type of
diagnosing vehicle problems and acquiring faults should be captured (refer to “FAULT
vehicle information. REPORTER CONFIGURATION SCREEN” on
page 26).

Page 17
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Calibrate Throttle Pedal button to Click on the Cylinder Cut-Out Test button to
run the Calibrate Throttle Pedal function if an initiate specialized cylinder tests (refer to
accelerator pedal has been replaced (refer to “CYLINDER CUT-OUT TEST DISPLAY
“CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL DIALOG SCREEN” on page 28). Cycle power with key
SCREEN” on page 27). switch before continuing with other tests.

Click on the Back button to return to the Service Click on the Engine Run-Up Test button to
Diagnostics menu. initiate testing on the unit pumps (refer to
“ENGINE RUN-UP TEST SCREEN” on page 28).
Cycle power with key switch before continuing
SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODES MENU
with other tests.
The Special Diagnostic Modes Menu contains the
following eight screens: Chassis Dyno Mode, Click on the Engine Compression button to
Cylinder Cut-Out Test, Engine Run-Up Test, initiate a specialized cylinder compression test
Engine Compression, Engine Brake Test, Wiggle (refer to “ENGINE COMPRESSION TEST
Wire Test, Cylinder Balance Test, and VTG Test. SCREEN” on page 29). Cycle power with key
Each screen contains functions to aid in testing switch before continuing with other tests.
vehicle performance and diagnosing vehicle
problems. Click on the Engine Brake Test button to run
16
engine brake solenoid test (refer to “ENGINE
BRAKE TEST SCREEN” on page 29). Cycle
power with key switch before continuing with
other tests.

Click on the Wiggle Wire Test button to initiate

the wiggle wire test (refer to “WIGGLE WIRE
TEST SCREEN” on page 30). Cycle power with
key switch before continuing with other tests.

Click on the Cylinder Balance Test button to

initiate the cylinder balance test (refer to
“CYLINDER BALANCE TEST” on page 30).
Cycle power with key switch before continuing
with other tests.

Click on the VTG Test button to initiate the VTG

Figure 16 — Special Diagnostic Modes Menu
test (refer to “VTG VANE POSITION
CALIBRATION TEST” on page 31). Cycle power
Click on the Chassis Dyno Mode button to with key switch before continuing with other tests.
initiate Chassis DYNO Mode (refer to “CHASSIS
DYNO MODE DISPLAY SCREEN” on page 27). Click on the Back button to return to the Service
Cycle power with key switch before continuing Diagnostics menu.
with other tests.

Page 18
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
PARAMETER MONITORING DISPLAY First, make your selections using the SAE
SCREENS Parameter Menu screen and then click on the
Next button to continue (see Figure 12).
The Parameter Monitoring screen, accessed from
the Monitor Parameters button, allows you to
Click on the Pause button to pause live
monitor the parameters selected, view faults,
monitoring.
change the idle speed and take a picture of the
current displayed screen.
17 Click on the View Faults button to view the fault
table.

Click on the Change Idle Speed button to

change the low-idle speed (please refer to
“CHANGE IDLE SPEED ENTRY FORM” on page
32 for instructions).

Engine must be running with park brake set and

accelerator not depressed.

Click on the Snapshot button to take a picture of

the current display screen.

Click on the Back button to return to the SAE

Figure 17 — Parameters Monitoring Standard Display Parameter menu.
Screen
18
Click on the Main Menu button to return to the
Service Diagnostics menu.

The parameter values are continuously updated

as the data is received on the serial data line. If
active faults are detected during a monitoring
session, the Fault Status item on the screen will
change from “No Faults Noted” to “Faults
Occurred.” To find out what the fault is, click on
the View Faults button.

ALL ACTIVE FAULTS DISPLAY SCREEN

The Active Faults screen allows you to view faults
that are presently occurring. A description of the
fault is displayed in a scrollable window.

Figure 18 — Parameters Monitoring Advanced Display

Screen (for ASET™ AC Engines Only)

The Parameters Monitoring Advanced Display

screen is for ASET™ AC engines (1MS334 or
higher EECU software) only.

Page 19
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Print button to print the Fault Table
19

display screen.

Click on the Clear Fault Codes button to clear

the Fault Table.

Click on the Fault Reporter button to view, print,

save and/or clear faults from the fault record
(refer to “FAULT REPORTER SCREEN” on page
20).

Click on the Back button to return to the Fault

menu.

FAULT REPORTER SCREEN

The Fault Reporter screen displays detailed
Figure 19 — All Active Faults Display information during and around the time when a
fault occurs. The Fault Reporter logs any fault
Click on the Fault Reporter button to view, print, found on a vehicle. This information can be
save and/or clear faults from the fault record viewed, printed, saved and erased. The Fault
(refer to “FAULT REPORTER SCREEN” on page Reporter can contain up to four faults and has two
20). operating modes: Occurrence (default) and
History.
Click on the Back button to return to the Fault
menu. Occurrence Mode records operating conditions
that exist when a fault is detected via the J1587
line. When a fault becomes active, the data is
CONTROLLER FAULT TABLE DISPLAY written to the Fault Reporter and saved. Although
SCREEN information will not be lost to an intermittent
The Controller Fault Table screen displays the power failure, it can be overwritten if a new fault
current faults and allows you to print and clear the becomes active. Therefore, it is recommended
fault codes. that the fault be viewed and printed if a record is
20 needed.

History Mode checks the operating data every

few seconds until a fault is detected that matches
a specified trigger fault. When detected, the fault
and its operating condition are written and saved
to the Fault Reporter. The data will not be
overwritten because Fault Reporter becomes
“frozen” to provide a history of what was
happening on the chassis just before the fault
occurred. To overwrite the data, a technician must
reset the history mode or change the Fault
Reporter to occurrence mode. Some history
information may be lost if an intermittent power
failure occurs before the trigger fault is detected.

The Fault Reporter can log faults from the

transmission controller, ABS, Vorad, Qualcomm
Figure 20 — Controller Fault Table Display Screen
and the Engine and Vehicle ECUs. Four registers,
or “buckets,” of memory, are available to log
faults. The first bucket holds the most recent fault.

Page 20
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
21

Fault Reporter will not always log the most recent

fault because of active time limits and the fact that
times can vary between buckets. For example, if
a fault comes in and all the buckets are in use, the
fault will be dropped. The active faults must
become inactive by clearing the Fault Reporter
(refer to “CLEARING FAULT REPORTER” on
page 21).

One bucket is reserved for Engine ECU faults and

another for Vehicle ECU faults. The fourth bucket
is reserved for either an Engine or Vehicle ECU
fault.

Each bucket can look for a specific fault. Each Figure 21 — Fault Reporter Screen
bucket has a MID filter, a PID or SID filter and a
FMI filter. Any of these filters can be set to log Click on the Print button to print the Fault
“ALL.” Consequently, you can set up a log to Reporter Table display screen.
record all PID 100 faults from any MID.
Click on the Save button to save data to the
appropriate directory.

Click on the Clear Fault Reporter button to

The tool requires that the user have some remove faults from the Fault Reporter table.
knowledge of the J1587 protocol because there is
no help by design.

Each bucket also has a time limit for which it will It is recommended that if you clear faults from the
be active (60 seconds by default) and can log the Fault Reporter, clear the ECU fault tables also so
fault for a total of 10 times. Once a bucket’s time that they and Fault Reporter stay synchronized.
limit has expired, it becomes available to log
another fault. Fault Reporter will enter faults into
the oldest available bucket that allows the fault to Click on the Back button to return to the Active
pass in that bucket’s filters. Data in Fault Reporter Faults Table display.
moves out and into the fault log table to be
replaced with new data. CLEARING FAULT REPORTER
There are four ways to clear data from the Fault
Reporter:
History Mode writes operation data to all four 앫 Clear Fault Reporter directly.
buckets every two seconds (programmable) in a 앫 Clear either fault table (VECU or EECU).
circular loop.
앫 Switch between History and Occurrence
modes.
앫 Allow Fault Reporter to automatically clear
data if a fault does not become active after
50 engine starts.

Page 21
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT REPORTER LOG ITEMS
Fault Reporter will log the following when a fault is
discovered:

Item Description
Time & Date Stamp Time & Date Stamp when fault first occurred
Vehicle Distance Odometer reading when fault first occurred
MID MID of the module reporting the fault
PID or SID PID or SID of fault
FMI Fault FMI
Duration Amount of time the fault was active
Vehicle Speed Vehicle speed when fault became active
Engine Speed Engine speed when fault became active
Accelerator Pedal Pedal position when fault became active
Switches All switch positions
Intake Temperature Intake Manifold Temp. when fault active
Coolant Temperature Engine Coolant Temp. when fault active
Ambient Air Temperature Ambient temperature when fault active
Voltage System voltage
Percent Engine Load Percent engine load when fault became active
Speed Control Status Cruise/brake/set/decel/resume/clutch modes
Inputs Faulted Fault Reporter will tag critical items in this list that were
faulted when a fault occurred: engine speed, vehicle speed,
intake, coolant and ambient temperature
Time of up to 8 secondary occurrences

NOTE: If the service tool finds a fault in the fault log that is also in the Fault Reporter, it will tag (***) to that fault, indicating that
more information is available.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY SCREEN

22

The Vehicle Information screen displays vehicle

information and allows you to change the
governor type. Changing the governor type
affects the way the accelerator position is used to
determine the driver’s desired power or speed but
doesn’t affect the engine power or torque rise.
You may choose the All Speed governor or an
“automotive” type Mini-Max governor.

Figure 22 — Vehicle Information Display Screen

Page 22
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Governor Type button to change the
24

governor type. Cycle power with the key switch

for the governor change to take effect.

When changing the governor type, make sure the

engine is not running.

Click on the Back button to return to the

Diagnostic Tools menu.

PROGRAMMING HISTORY DISPLAY SCREEN

The Programming History screen shows the
programming history of the Vehicle and Engine
ECU OEM, vehicle and engine data, customer Figure 24 — Switch Status Display Screen
data and fleet data.
23
Click on the Back button to return to the
Diagnostic Tools menu.

VEHICLE DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN

The Vehicle Data Log screen displays the life and
trip information of the vehicle. The items shown
under “Life” are the totals for each item. The
totals accumulate from the date the vehicle was
built or from the date the V-MAC module was
changed or reprogrammed.
25

Figure 23 — Programming History Display Screen

Click on the Back button to return to the

Diagnostic Tools menu.

SWITCH STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN

The Switch Status screen monitors and displays
the current status of the cab-mounted switches. It
is especially useful for diagnosing wiring
problems associated with these switches.
Figure 25 — Vehicle Data Log Display Screen

Click on the Reset button to reset the trip values

of the Vehicle Data Log to zero.

Click on the Save button to save the Vehicle Data

Log. A pop-up window will appear and ask for a
location to save the text file information.

Page 23
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Print button to print the Vehicle Data When a maintenance item is selected, the
Log. Maintenance Reset Confirmation pop-up box will
appear, asking if you are sure you want to reset
Click on the Back button to return to the the item. Click on the Yes button to reset the
Diagnostic Tools menu. maintenance item, and return to the Maintenance
Data Log screen.
MAINTENANCE DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN
Then, click on the Save button to save the
The Maintenance Data Log screen displays Maintenance Data Log. A pop-up window will
maintenance items such as oil change and allows appear and ask for a location to save the text file
you to reset an item. information.
26

Click on the Cancel button to exit the

Maintenance Reset screen

Click on the Back button to return to the

Diagnostic Tools menu.

To see changes made to maintenance items, you

must back out and re-enter the Maintenance Data
Log Display screen.

ENABLE PREDICTIVE OIL CHANGE

MESSAGE

Figure 26 — Maintenance Data Log Display Screen

If available, the Enable Predictive Oil Change
message permits you to enable this feature after
Click on the Reset button to call up the an oil change reset. This feature must first be
Maintenance Reset screen. Select the enabled in OEM Data (on the MACK database)
maintenance item you want to reset by clicking on via the F3 Update Option screen of V-MAC.
28
the appropriate button.
27

Figure 28 — Enable Predictive Oil Change Message

Click on the Yes button to enable Predictive Oil

Change. A Caution message (see Figure 29) will
appear with a list of qualifications. If the vehicle
meets the requirement’s list, click on the Yes
button. The Predictive Oil Change feature will
now be enabled.

Figure 27 — Maintenance Reset Screen

Page 24
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SCREEN
29

The Adaptive Cruise Control screen allows you to

view a detected fault in active cruise control. For
more information about Adaptive Cruise Control,
refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 35.
30

Figure 29 — Caution Message

If available, Predictive Oil Change can only be

enabled/disabled when resetting the oil change or
oil & filter change.

If available, as a standalone feature, Predictive

Oil Change is supported with VECU software
1MS336 or higher.
Figure 30 — Adaptive Cruise Control Screen

Click on the Adaptive Cruise Control button to

view a detected fault.
Predictive Oil Change is not available on MR and
LE models. Predictive Oil Change must not be Click on the Yes button to disable Adaptive
enabled if the engine ECU software is 1MS334, Cruise Control and re-enable standard cruise
1MS334A, 1MS368 or 1MS375. control.

For more information on Predictive Oil Change,

refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 35. Notify the driver that Adaptive Cruise Control is
disabled.

Click on the Back button to return to the

Diagnostic Tools menu.

Additional information on Adaptive Cruise Control

is available in the Eaton® VORAD® (EVT-300)
Collision Warning System/SmartCruise®
Troubleshooting Manual, 8-335.

Page 25
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT REPORTER CONFIGURATION FAULT REPORTER ADVANCED SETUP
SCREEN SCREEN
The Fault Reporter Configuration screen allows The Fault Reporter Advanced Setup screen,
you to set the Fault Reporter to run under accessed from the Fault Reporter Configuration
Occurrence Mode or History Mode. For more screen, allows you to select the type of operating
information refer to the “SERVICE mode (History or Occurrence) to record a fault
DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table on page 35. and four filters to record specific faults of interest.
31 32

Figure 31 — Fault Reporter Configuration Screen Figure 32 — Fault Reporter Advanced Setup Screen

Click on the Clear button to clear data in the Fault

Reporter.
Expertise in J1587 protocol is required to
program filters. Do not attempt to program filters if
you have no such expertise. Improper
Data will be erased if you clear it; therefore, print
configuration of the Fault Reporter Advanced
a copy of the data before clearing the Fault
Setup may lead to the omission of pertinent
Reporter if a record of the fault is desired.
diagnostic information from the Fault Reporter
table. Please refer to the Troubleshooting/SAE
Click on the Set Defaults button to select Fault Message Descriptions section found in the
Reporter default settings. V-MAC® III Service Manual, Mack Trucks, Inc.
publication number 8-211, for additional
Click on the Advanced Setup button to select information.
Occurrence Mode or History Mode, choose what
type of faults to capture, decide the snapshot time
The Fault Reporter Advanced Setup screen also
between logged records, and define how long a
contains the Retrigger Hold-Off function, which
record should be “saved” before being overwritten
decides how long the Fault Reporter will delay
(refer to “FAULT REPORTER ADVANCED
writing another incident of a previously recorded
SETUP SCREEN” on page 26).
fault. For information on Fault Reporter Advanced
Setup, refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Back button to return to the
FUNCTIONS” table on page 35.
Diagnostic Tools menu.

Page 26
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL DIALOG 3. If the procedure is successful, you will
SCREEN receive a pop-up message indicating a
33 successful calibration.
4. If the procedure fails, repeat the procedure.
To run this test on a Cummins engine, please
refer to the “CUMMINS CALIBRATE THROTTLE
PEDAL DIALOG SCREEN” on page 34.

CHASSIS DYNO MODE DISPLAY SCREEN

The Chassis Dyno Mode screen allows the
vehicle to be operated on a dynamometer without
creating a service brake fault code. During
normal operation, V-MAC will drop the vehicle out
of cruise control mode if a rapid deceleration
without a service brake application is detected.
During the chassis dyno mode, V-MAC ignores
deceleration without a service brake application,
allowing the vehicle to be operated on a
Figure 33 — Calibrate Throttle Pedal Dialog Screen dynamometer with cruise control turned in the
ON position.
The Calibration Throttle Pedal procedure is 35
available for Mack engines beginning with
1MS376 VECU software.

Click on the Calibrate Throttle Pedal button in

the Diagnostics menu. The Calibrate Throttle
Pedal dialog screen will appear.

Click on the Yes button to calibrate the throttle

pedal (or click on the No button to cancel the
procedure). The Calibrate Throttle Pedal
Procedure Dialog screen will appear with a set of
instructions.
34

Figure 34 — Procedure Dialog Screen Figure 35 — Chassis Dyno Mode Screen

The instructions are as follows: Click on the Chassis Dyno Mode button from the
Special Diagnostics menu.
1. Click on the OK button.
2. Press the accelerator pedal down and Click on the Start Test button to begin.
release (for a total of about 2 seconds from
the down and up position of the accelerator Click on the Exit button to enter another test
pedal). Repeat two more times. mode.

Click on the Back button to return to the

Diagnostic Tools menu.

Page 27
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
ENGINE RUN-UP TEST SCREEN
The Engine Run-Up Test screen allows you to
Be sure to cycle the key switch OFF, and wait at check the fuel delivery of each individual unit
least 7 seconds. Then cycle the key switch back pump/injector pair to diagnose low power
ON after the dynamometer tests are completed. complaints and problems with rough running.
Do NOT put the chassis back into operation with This test will run up each pump three times. For
the Chassis DYNO Mode enabled. more information on this test, please refer to the
“SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table
on page 35.
37
CYLINDER CUT-OUT TEST DISPLAY SCREEN
The Cylinder Cut-Out Test screen allows you to
individually test each cylinder at low idle to help
identify the source of rough running or engine
miss. For more information on this test, please
refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 35.
36

Figure 37 — Engine Run-Up Test Screen

The engine must be running at idle with the

parking brake ON and the driveline disengaged.

Figure 36 — Cylinder Cut-Out Test Screen Click on the Engine Run-Up Test button from the
Special Diagnostics menu.
Click on the Cylinder Cut-Out Test button from
the Special Diagnostics menu. Click on the Start Test button to test each
individual unit pump/injector pair. Click the Stop
Select the appropriate test cylinder in the “Select Test button to end test. Cycle power with key
Test Cylinder” area of the screen. The example in switch before continuing with other tests.
Figure 36 has selected cylinder 1. To cancel a test, click on the Cancel Test button
in the Test Control Panel area of the screen.
Then, click on the Start Test button to test the
selected cylinder.

Click on the Stop Test or Cancel Test button to To generate a report and save results, select
end the test. Cycle power with key switch before “Save Test Results to File” — located at the
continuing with other tests. bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
Click on the Back button to return to the Service for a location to save the text file.
Diagnostics menu.
Click on the Back button to return to the Service
Diagnostics menu.

Page 28
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
ENGINE COMPRESSION TEST SCREEN Click on the Back button to return to Service
Diagnostics menu.
The Engine Compression Test screen allows you
to isolate and test the compression of each
cylinder to help diagnose low power complaints ENGINE BRAKE TEST SCREEN
and problems with rough running. For more
The Engine Brake Test screen lets you verify that
information on this test, please refer to the
the engine brake solenoids are electrically
“SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table
operational. For more information on this test,
on page 35.
38 please refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 35.
39

Figure 38 — Engine Compression Test Screen

Figure 39 — Engine Brake Test Screen

Click on the Engine Compression button from
the Special Diagnostics menu.
Click on the Engine Brake Test from the Special
Click on the Start Test button to initiate the Diagnostics menu.
engine compression test.
Choose the engine brake to be tested under the
Engine Brake Test area of the screen.

Then, click on the Start Brake Test button to

To generate a report and save results, select initiate the engine brake solenoid test.
“Save Test Results to File” — located at the
bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to save the text file.
Parking brake must be set to perform the current
test.

The Starter must be engaged when prompted to

run this test.
While test is being performed, listen for “clicking”
sounds under the valve covers.
Click on the Stop Test button when finished.

Click on the Cancel Test button to end the test or

allow the test to end itself. Cycle power with key
switch before continuing with other tests.

Page 29
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
40

To generate a report and save results, select

“Save Test Results to File” — located at the
bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to save the text file.

Click on the Stop Test or Cancel Test button to

end the test. Cycle power with key switch before
continuing with other tests.

Click on the Back button to return to the Service

Diagnostics menu.

WIGGLE WIRE TEST SCREEN Figure 40 — Wiggle Wire Test Screen

The Wiggle Wire Test screen helps to detect open
or short conditions in the vehicle wiring harness Click on the Wiggle Wire Test button from the
or connectors. The test can be invoked at any Special Diagnostics menu.
time.
Click on the Start Wire Test button to enable
wiggle wire mode.

Click on the Cancel Test button to cancel the

It is assumed that a technician will supervise test.
while the Wiggle Wire Test is running.
Click on the Exit Wire Test button to end the test.
When the Start button is clicked, the test will run Cycle power with key switch before continuing
automatically and continuously. When the Exit with other tests.
button is clicked, the technician can go to any
other screen in Service Diagnostics and monitor Click on the Back button to return to the Service
parameters or faults as appropriate. For more Diagnostics menu.
information on this test, please refer to the
“SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table CYLINDER BALANCE TEST
on page 35.
The Cylinder Balance Test screen shows you how
the Engine ECU is balancing the cylinders by
measuring how much fuel is being displaced. The
screen will display a graphical representation of a
For Step 5 systems (VECU s/w 1MS316A), this deviation from the average fuel usage.
test is supported in the VECU only. For Step 8
and above systems (VECU s/w 1MS336,
1MS336A, 1MS349, and 1MS364 and EECU s/w
1MS327, 1MS363, 1MS334A and 1MS368), this
test is supported in both the VECU and EECU.

Page 30
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
41 42

Figure 41 — Cylinder Balance Test Screen Figure 42 — VTG Vane Position Calibration Test Screen

Click on the Start Balance Test button to begin Typically, this test is run when a new VTG Vane
the test. unit is installed.

Click on the Stop button to stop the test.

Click on the Cancel Test button to cancel the It is recommended that the technician performing
test. this test have an assistant confirm that the
actuator reaches its 0% and 100% stopped
Click on the Back button to return to the Service positions.
Diagnostics menu.

The Cylinder Balance Test is supported for Step 4 To perform this test, the engine must be off, the
(EECU s/w 1MS38P2) ONLY. ignition key turned to the ON position, the coolant
temperature above 140°F and the turbocharger
relatively cool (not to operating temperature).
VTG VANE POSITION CALIBRATION TEST Also, ensure that primary and secondary air
pressure is at least 110 psi.
The VTG Vane Position Calibration Test screen
helps to aid in determining whether boost
pressure or power complaints are due to incorrect
calibration. The test will automatically program
the Engine ECU with the vane position’s To generate a report and save results, select
calibration data. Or, the tool will indicate that the “Save Test Results to File” — located at the
sensor is out of range and should be replaced. bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to save the text file.

Click on the Start Test button to begin the VTG

Vane Position Calibration test. Ensure that an
assistant monitors the movement of the actuator.

Click on the Stop button to stop the test if

needed.

Page 31
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Cancel Test button to cancel the test Click on the Change Idle Speed button to launch
if needed. the Change Idle Speed entry form. Adjust the
new idle speed using the Up & Down arrow
Click on the Back button to return to the Service controls as shown in Figure 43. Click the OK
Diagnostics menu. button to accept the new idle speed or click on the
Cancel button to exit the entry form without
saving changes.

The VTG Vane Position Calibration Test is Cummins Screen Summaries

supported for Step 2 and higher ASET™ AC
engines (with EECU s/w 1MS334A, 1MS368, The following screens will appear if the vehicle is
1MS368A and 1MS378) only. equipped with a Cummins engine (to identify that
you are connected to a Cummins ECU, launch
Service Diagnostics and go to Vehicle Information
screen located in the Diagnostics portion of the
software).
If the actuator does not visibly reach its 100%
stopped position, the test results have failed,
even if the diagnostic tool reports a successful CUMMINS SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS MAIN
test. Either the air pressure is too low or the MENU
mechanism is binding and must be replaced. 44

CHANGE IDLE SPEED ENTRY FORM

The Change Idle Speed entry form, accessed
from the Parameter Monitor Display screen, is
used to change the low idle speed setting.

To change the idle speed, the engine must be

running with the park brake set and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
43

Figure 44 — Cummins Service Diagnostics Main Menu

This menu lists the available options for a vehicle

equipped with a Cummins engine.

Click on the Monitor Parameters button to use

the parameter monitoring capabilities (refer to the
“CUMMINS SAE PARAMETER MENU
SELECTION SCREEN” on page 33).

Click on the Fault Codes button to view and clear

faults (refer to “FAULT CODES MENU” on page
17).

Click on the Diagnostics button to use the

Figure 43 — Change Idle Speed Entry Form V-MAC system’s diagnostic tools (refer to
“CUMMINS DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU” on
page 33).

Page 32
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Utilities button to customize the CUMMINS DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU
Service Diagnostics configuration (refer to
The Cummins Diagnostic Tools Menu contains
“UTILITIES MENU” on page 13).
three screens: Vehicle Information, Programming
History and Calibrate Throttle Pedal. Each screen
Click on the Quit button to exit the program.
contains functions to aid in diagnosing vehicle
problems and acquiring vehicle information.
CUMMINS SAE PARAMETER MENU 46

SELECTION SCREEN
The Cummins SAE Parameter Menu Selection
Screen allows you to chose which parameters
you want to display during a monitoring session.
45

Figure 46 — Cummins Diagnostic Tools Menu

Click on the Vehicle Information button to view

the Vehicle Information display screen (refer to
“VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY SCREEN”
on page 22).
Figure 45 — Cummins SAE Parameter Menu Selection
Screen
Click on the Programming History button to
Click on the Default Selections button to select view the programming history for each ECU (refer
the default parameters. to “PROGRAMMING HISTORY DISPLAY
SCREEN” on page 23).
Click on the Save As Default button to save the
current selections as the default. Note that there Click on the Calibrate Throttle Pedal button to
can only be one set of default parameters. access the Calibrate Throttle Pedal Screen (refer
to “CUMMINS CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL
Click on the Clear Selections button to clear the DIALOG SCREEN” on page 34).
current parameter selections.
Click on the Back button to return to the
Click on the Next button to begin parameter Cummins Service Diagnostics Main Menu.
monitoring with the current selections.

Click on the Main Menu button to return to the

Cummins Service Diagnostics Menu.

Page 33
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
CUMMINS CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL Click on the Yes button to calibrate the throttle
DIALOG SCREEN pedal (or click on the No button to cancel the
47 procedure). The Calibrate Throttle Pedal
Procedure dialog screen will appear.
48

Figure 48 — Cummins Calibrate Throttle Pedal

Procedure Dialog Screen

A pop-up window will appear with instructions.

The instructions are as follows:
1. Click on the OK button.
2. Press the accelerator pedal down and
release (for a total of about 2 seconds from
the down and up position of the accelerator
pedal). Repeat two more times.
Figure 47 — Cummins Calibrate Throttle Pedal Dialog
3. If the procedure is successful, you will
Screen
receive a pop-up message indicating a
Click on the Calibrate Throttle Pedal button. The successful calibration.
Calibrate Throttle Pedal dialog screen will appear. 4. If the procedure fails, repeat the procedure.

STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III

Step Level System VECU Software P/N EECU Software P/N
2† 1MS334A
3† 1MS368
1MS368A
4† 1MS378
4 1MS312A 1MS38P2
5 1MS316A 1MS317
6 1MS320
7 1MS328 1MS326
7A 1MS326A
8 1MS336 1MS327
1MS327 Ω (12MS413AM)
8A 1MS336A
9 1MS349 1MS363
9B* 1MS364
10* 1MS369 1MS375
11* 1MS376

† — For ASET™ AC engines

* — For ASET™ AI engines
Ω — For integral barometric sensor

Page 34
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS

Function Description Location Instructions
Active Faults Presents a list of all controllers →Monitor Parameters If any faults occurred during the current monitoring session, this screen will
While that transmitted active faults →Next (Parameter Monitoring) automatically appear upon exiting the Parameter Monitoring display screen. To
Monitoring during the current monitoring exit the screen, click on the OK button.
List session.
Calibrate Allows the user to calibrate the →Service Diagnostic 1. Click on the Yes button to begin the procedure.
Throttle Pedal throttle pedal. →Diagnostics (Calibrate Throttle
2. Press the throttle pedal down and release (for about a total of 2 seconds).
Pedal)
3. Press the throttle pedal down and release (for about a total of 2 seconds).
4. Press the throttle pedal down and release (for about a total of 2 seconds).
5. A “procedure successful” or “procedure failed” message will appear after
the procedure is complete. Repeat the process if unsuccessful.
NOTE: This feature is available for all engines with Step 11 (1MS376) VECU
s/w. This feature is also available with a Cummins engine (using Mack Trucks
Cummins Service Diagnostic Software).
Capturing Allows the user to take a →Monitor Parameters Click on the Snapshot button to create a display screen snapshot.
Display picture or “snapshot” of the →Next (Parameter Monitoring)
Screen current Parameter Monitoring NOTE: Each snapshot will be saved in the V-MACa file named vmxxxxxx.prn
Snapshots display screen. (where “xxxxxx” stands for the serial number of the vehicle). If no file exists, a
new file will be created in the vmacss directory.
Each snapshot can be viewed and/or printed at a later time.
Changing Allows the user to change the →Monitor Parameters 1. Click on the Change Idle Speed button to bring up the Engine Idle Speed
Engine Idle idle speed during live or →Next (Parameter Monitoring) entry form.
Speed paused parameter monitoring. NOTE: The current speed will be displayed if it is within the allowable range
(500 to 750 rpm or 500–700 rpm with 1MS375 and 1MS378 EECU s/w).
Otherwise, the initial engine speed will be set at 650 rpm.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

2. Type in the desired engine idle speed and click on the OK button.
NOTE: The new engine idle speed must be between 500 and 750 rpm or
500–700 rpm with 1MS375 and 1MS378 EECU s/w. If it is not within this range,
a message will appear instructing the user to enter a speed between this range.

Page 35
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 36
Changing the Allows the user to change the →Diagnostics Click on the Governor Type button to toggle between All Speed and Min-Max.
Governor governor type between All →Vehicle Information
Type Speed and Min-Max. The main advantage of the All Speed governor is its load-sensing ability, which
enables the engine to maintain a preselected engine speed for PTO
NOTE: Changing the governor applications. This governor uses the throttle pedal position to control engine
selection will not affect the speed. If an increase in engine load requires more horsepower to maintain the
engine power rating or torque engine speed, the All Speed governor increases the horsepower automatically
rise. It will only affect how the (within limits). All engine speeds are controlled in this way, from low idle with no
accelerator position is used to load to high idle with full load.
determine the driver's desired
power or speed. The Min-Max governor may be regarded as faster and more responsive but may
be too sensitive for some drivers or applications. This governor has a more
direct or proportional response to the throttle pedal; it uses the throttle pedal
position to control engine power. If the pedal is depressed halfway, the engine
will deliver 50% of the power. If the pedal is depressed another 10%, it will
deliver 60% of the available power. The Min-Max governor regulates engine
speed only at the minimum (0%) or maximum (100%) throttle position. In the
range between the minimum and maximum positions, the driver controls the
speed by adjusting the throttle pedal position.
NOTE: Once the governor type is changed, a message will appear instructing
the user to cycle the ignition.
Chassis Programs V-MAC to ignore →Special Diagnostic Modes During normal operation, V-MAC will drop a vehicle out of cruise control if a
DYNO Mode deceleration without service →Chassis DYNO Mode rapid deceleration occurs without service brake application. With this mode
brake application. enabled, the vehicle can be operated on a dynamometer with cruise control
enabled.
NOTE: Be sure to cycle the ignition (turn the key OFF, wait 7 seconds, then turn
the key ON again) after the dynamometer tests are completed. Do NOT put the
chassis back into operation with Chassis DYNO Mode enabled.
Clearing Allows the user to clear the →Monitor Parameters At any time, press the Clear Selections button to erase the current selections.
Current current selections.
Selections
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Clearing Fault Allows the user to clear the →Fault Codes Click on the Clear Fault Codes button for confirmation.
Tables fault table for any given →Fault Table
controller that is displayed. NOTE: If a fault occurs after the fault table is cleared and before the power to
the controller is cycled (turned OFF and then ON again), the fault may not be
entered into the controller's fault table. Therefore, a request to view the fault
table immediately after it has been cleared may not accurately display faults that
occurred after the table was cleared. To view faults that occurred after clearing
the table, use the Active Faults selection from the Fault menu.
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Cylinder Allows the technician to see →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 4 systems (EECU 1MS38P2) only.
Balance Test how the EECU is balancing the →Cylinder Test
cylinders by measuring how The upper portion of the Cylinder Balance Test display screen shows the results
much fuel is being displaced. of the cylinder balance test.
NOTE: The numbers displayed represent the correction needed to match the
desired mg/stroke (as determined by the calibration code).
NOTE: Test results must be interpreted according to firing order (1-5-3-6-2-4). It
isn’t unusual for a cylinder before or after a “bad” cylinder in the firing order to
also be high or low in fuel, as compared to the mean. This can also be true with
cylinders 360 degrees out of phase with the problem cylinder. However, the flow
of these sister cylinders is usually in the opposite direction.
Cylinder Individually tests each of the →Special Diagnostic Modes To use the cylinder cut-out test, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph and the
Cut-Out Test cylinders at low idle to help →Cylinder Test parking brake must be set. For Step 4 systems (EECU software 1MS38P2), the
identify the source of rough throttle position must be at 0%.
running or an engine miss.
To initiate a test, select the cylinder to be cut out and click on the Start Cut-Out
button.
Default Allows the user to change the →Utilities 1. Select the desired unit for each item:
Display communications port, display Communications Port — Most systems will use COM 1 as the
Settings units (i.e., metric vs. English) communications port.
and language used in the International Unit Type — Set to either metric or English display units.
V-MAC programs.
Language — At this time, the only language available is English.
2. Click on the Save Default Settings button.
Engine Brake Verifies that the engine brake →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 7 and higher EECU software (s/w) and Step 2 and
Test solenoids are electrically →Engine Brake Test higher EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see the “STEP/
operational. SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34.
To use the engine brake test, the key switch must be on while the engine is not
running (engine rpm = 0). Once the test is active, the solenoid(s) will turn on
and off about once per second and produce a faint clicking sound. Absence of
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

the clicking sound may indicate a wiring problem.

The software will automatically cycle the key switch.
NOTE: Engine brake should be off during the test.

Page 37
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 38
Engine Isolates and tests the →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 7 and higher EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher
Compression compression of each individual →Engine Compression Test EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Test cylinder to diagnose low power IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34.
complaints and problems with
rough running. Engine should Characterizes each cylinder’s compression stroke via a ratio (compression time/
be at operating temperature to expansion time). An engine with good compression has a ratio between
perform this test to rule out a 1.85 to 1.95.
cold engine start. Each cylinder should be compared with other cylinders in the engine, but not
with those from other engines.
When the start button is clicked, the technician will be instructed to engage the
starter. The test mode will prevent engine fueling.
NOTE: To run this test, the engine must be off, the transmission in neutral with
the clutch pedal released and the parking brake set.
Engine Checks the fuel delivery of →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 7 and higher EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher
Run-Up Test each individual unit pump/ →Engine Run-Up Test EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
injector pair to diagnose low IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34.
power complaints and
problems with rough running. When the test is active, the system automatically cuts out each cylinder. The
engine ECU then injects fuel at a fixed rate through the remaining five cylinders
and measures the acceleration rate.
The test will be performed 18 times, three times for each cylinder. Once
completed, the acceleration rates can be compared to determine if one of the
cylinders has a fuel delivery problem. Results should be compared from
cylinder to cylinder for that engine, rather than from engine to engine.
Cylinders with LOW accelerations may be injecting too much fuel. Cylinders
with HIGH accelerations may not be injecting enough fuel.
NOTE: To run this test, the engine must be running, the transmission in neutral
with the clutch pedal released and the parking brake set.
Fault Checks for active and inactive →Monitor Parameters If an active fault is detected during a live monitoring session, the Fault Status
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Monitoring faults during monitoring. →Next (Parameter Monitoring) item on the display screen will change from “No Faults Noted” to “Fault Noted.”
During Live This message will remain on the display screen until the fault becomes inactive.
Parameter
Monitoring
Fault Logs detailed information →Active Faults or Controller Fault For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Reporter during and around the time Table IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34.
when a fault occurs. →Fault Reporter
The Fault Reporter will log information about vehicle conditions when a fault
occurs if set in Occurrence Mode. Or, Fault Reporter will log information about
vehicle conditions just before a fault occurs if set in History Mode.
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Fault Selects the type of operating → Diagnostics For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Reporter mode to record faults. →Configure Fault Reporter IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34.
Advanced (Advanced Setup)
Setup NOTE: Only the third and fourth MID filters can be changed by the operator (the
default is ALL). The first and second MID filters are limited to personnel who
have expertise in J1587 protocol.
The Fault Reporter will record faults from all devices on the J1587 line (for
example, ABS/ATC, transmission controller, headway controller and so on).
Fault Allows the user to configure → Diagnostics For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Reporter the Fault Reporter to run under →Configure Fault Reporter IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34.
Configuration Occurrence Mode or History
Mode. In Occurrence Mode, select what type of faults to capture by defining MID, PID,
and FMI filters for up to 4 fault records. In History Mode, select what type of
faults to capture and the snapshot time between recorded records. With
Occurrence Mode*, define how long a record should be “saved” before being
overwritten.
* NOTE: If there is an intermittent power loss, historical data can be lost if in
History Mode.
Live Allows the user to monitor the →Monitor Parameters Once all desired parameters have been selected, click on the Next button to
Parameter current selection of begin monitoring.
Monitoring parameters. Parameter values
are continuously updated as NOTE: If an active fault occurs, indicating that a certain parameter value is
information is received on the incorrect or is not being generated by the controller, the word “FAULT” will
J1587 serial data line. appear. The data for that parameter will return as soon as the fault becomes
inactive.
NOTE: If all parameters remain constant when it is suspected that some should
change, check that the serial data line has not become disconnected.
Refer to the “Parameter Selection” sections for details concerning parameter
selection.
Parameter Allows the user to select the →Monitor Parameters Click on the Default Selections button.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Selection current default parameters for

(Using Default monitoring. NOTE: Once the default parameters have been selected, they can be modified
Selections) by clicking on desired parameters.
Refer to the “Live Parameter Monitoring” function for instructions on monitoring
parameters.
Parameter Allows the user to select →Monitor Parameters Click on the desired parameter. A check mark will appear in the box, indicating
Selection individual parameters for that it has been selected.
(Using SAE monitoring. A maximum of
Parameter 30 parameters can be To deselect a parameter, click on the parameter again (the check mark will
Menu) selected. disappear).
Refer to the “Live Parameter Monitoring” function for instructions on monitoring
parameters.

Page 39
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 40
Paused Allows the user to freeze the →Monitor Parameters To pause monitoring, click on the Pause button.
Parameter display with the current →Next (Parameter Monitoring)
Monitoring parameter values on the To return to live monitoring, click on the Play button.
screen.
Predictive Oil Examines the operation of the →Diagnostics If available, Predictive Oil Change is a standalone feature and is available for
Change vehicle since the last oil →Maintenance Data Log Display CV, DM and RB models with Step 8, 1MS336 or higher VECU s/w.
change to determine when the
oil should next be changed. To operate this feature, enable Predictive Oil in OEM Data on the MACK
database via the F3 Update Option screen of V-MAC.
Predictive Oil Change uses the
average vehicle speed and NOTE: Predictive Oil can be enabled or disabled only when the Oil Change or
average fuel economy since Oil & Filter Change maintenance items are reset.
the last oil change to predict NOTE: This feature is not available on MR and LE models. Predictive Oil
the oil change interval. Change must not be enabled if the engine ECU software is 1MS334, 1MS334A,
1MS368, 1MS368A, 1MS375 or 1MS378.
NOTE: Predictive Oil is suited for chassis only that meet the following
requirements:
앫 The engine is equipped with a 28-quart oil pan.
앫 A Mack filtration system is used with dual full flow elements and a
Centri-Max® spinner filter.
앫 The engine uses approved EO-M+ oil for pre-2002 emissions and EO-N
Premium Plus for ASET™ AI engines.
앫 Oil consumption is 3000 miles per quart or better.
앫 The engine does not have a problem with oil dilution.
앫 Engine ECU software is NOT 1MS334, 1MS334A, 1MS363, 1MS368,
1MS368A, 1MS375 or 1MS378.
앫 The correct VECU data file has been installed to match the engine — ask
your MACK dealer.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Printing Allows the user to print →Utilities 1. Click on the Print Parameter Snapshot(s) button to bring up the
Display snapshots that were created Parameter Snapshot selection screen.
Screen during parameter monitoring. 2. Select the appropriate file.
Snapshots
Printing Fault Allows the user to print a →Fault Codes 1. Click on the Print button.
Tables snapshot of the current fault →Fault Table 2. Follow the instructions in the Print menu.
table.
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Resetting the Allows the user to reset the →Diagnostics Click on the Reset button. Then choose the maintenance item(s) to be reset.
Maintenance Maintenance Monitor →Maintenance Data Log Display
Data Log schedule. NOTE: Up to 15 maintenance items can be reset.
If the Predictive Oil Change feature (see Predictive Oil Change) is installed, the
user can enable or disable the feature following a reset of the Oil Change
maintenance item or the Oil & Filter Change maintenance item.
Resetting the Allows the user to reset vehicle →Diagnostics Click on the Reset button.
Vehicle Data trip information. →Vehicle Data Log Display
Log
Saving Allows the user to save the →Monitor Parameters Once all of the desired parameters have been selected, click on the Save as
Default current selections as the Default button to save the current selections to the default file.
Selections default.
Saving Allows the user to save the →Utilities 1. Click on the Save Default Settings button to bring up the Default File
Parameter current settings to the default Location entry form.
Defaults file. 2. In the Default File Location entry form, enter the correct path for the data
file and click on the OK button (if the default path is correct, click on the
OK button).
NOTE: Do not rename the default file.
Saving the Allows the user to save the →Diagnostics Click on the Save button.
Maintenance current Maintenance Monitor →Maintenance Data Log Display
Data Log schedule. NOTE: The data file for the maintenance data log will be named
vmxxxxxx.mtn (where “xxxxxx” stands for the vehicle serial number).
Saving the Allows the user to save life and →Diagnostics Click on the Save button.
Vehicle Data vehicle trip information logged →Vehicle Data Log Display
Log by DataMax™. NOTE: The data file for the vehicle data log will be named vmxxxxxx.trp
(where “xxxxxx” stands for the vehicle serial number).
Selecting Permits user to select a →Utilities 1. Click on the Preferences button.
Datalink datalink adapter. →Preferences
2. Click on the Common tab.
Adapter →Common Entry Form
3. To modify the RP1210A-compliant adapter type selection, do the
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

following:
a. Click on the RP1210A Device Name radio button.
b. Click on the Device Name drop-down arrow and select the adapter
desired.
c. Click on the Port drop-down arrow and select the com port desired.
d. Click on the Protocol drop-down arrow and select the protocol type
desired (protocol J1708 is recommended).
4. Click on the Apply button to make the change.
5. Click on the OK button to save changes.

Page 41
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 42
VTG Vane Calibrates the VTG vane →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines)
Position position actuator. →VTG Vane Position Calibration only. Please see table on page 34.
Calibration
This test aids in determining whether boost pressure or power complaints are
due to incorrect calibration.
To use the VTG vane position calibration, the engine must be off, the ignition
key turned to the ON position, and the coolant temperature above 140°F.
Primary and secondary air pressure must be at least 110 psi. The actuator
requires 95 psi to reach 100% vane position.
NOTE: If the turbocharger is too hot to touch, the engine should be idled and
then permitted to cool before the calibration is performed.
If the actuator does not visibly reach its 100% stopped position, the test results
have failed, even if the diagnostic tool reports a successful test. Either the air
pressure is too low or the mechanism is binding and must be replaced.
Viewing Allows the user to view faults →Fault Codes The number of currently active faults will appear in the Total number of faults for
Active Faults that are presently occurring. →Active Faults display field. If there are more than 4 active faults, the scroll bar will appear.
Each fault description identifies NOTE: If a displayed fault becomes inactive, it will be displayed as inactive
the controller responsible, temporarily and then will be removed.
severity, physical description,
blink code (including MID, PID/
SID and FMI) and current
status of the fault.
Viewing Allows the user to view →Diagnostics This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU s/w and EECU s/w, or
Adaptive detected fault in active cruise →Adaptive Cruise Control Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see table
Cruise control. Status on page 34.
Control Status
NOTE: When an Adaptive Cruise Control fault occurs, all cruise functions will be
disabled. The user may disable Adaptive Cruise Control and re-enable standard
cruise control, which requires reprogramming the VECU. Please refer to the
Eaton® VORAD® (EVT-300) Collision Warning System/SmartCruise®
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Troubleshooting Manual, 8-335, for information.

NOTE: The driver should be notified when standard cruise is operational
without the adaptive feature.
Eaton® SmartCruise® (optional) will decrease vehicle speed when it detects
that the vehicle is too close to a preceding vehicle. SmartCruise will resume
cruise speed when the proper minimum distance is re-established.
This screen displays the current status of active fault if SmartCruise or cruise
control is not operational. A fault message will occur if SmartCruise (in vehicles
equipped with SmartCruise) is defective.
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Viewing Allows the user to view →Utilities 1. Click on the Display Parameter Snapshot(s) button to bring up the
Display snapshots that were created Parameter Snapshot selection screen.
Screen during parameter monitoring. 2. Select the appropriate file.
Snapshots
Viewing Allows the user to view →Diagnostics Vehicle information includes VECU (software version, data file number and
Electronic information concerning the →Vehicle Information serial number), vehicle serial number, VIN and unit number.
Configuration electronic configuration of the
Information V-MAC system. Engine information includes EECU (software version, data file number and
serial number), rated power, rated speed, engine model and serial number.
Viewing Fault Allows the user to select and →Fault Codes The number of currently inactive faults will appear in the Total number of faults
Tables view the fault table of a specific →Controller Fault Table in table field. If there are more than 4 faults, the scroll bar will appear.
controller.
NOTE: In order to view a fault table, the engine must be OFF with the key in the
A fault table is a history of all ON position.
faults that a controller has
detected since the table was NOTE: If a fault occurs after the fault table is cleared and before the power to
last cleared. the controller is cycled (turned OFF and then ON again), the fault may not be
entered into the controller’s fault table. Therefore, a request to view the fault
Each fault history includes the table immediately after it has been cleared may not accurately display faults that
fault description (controller occurred after the table was cleared. To view faults that occurred after clearing
responsible, severity, physical the table, use the Active Faults selection from the Fault menu.
description, blink code and
current status) and the number
of times the fault was logged
(up to a maximum of 15).
Viewing Allows the user to view the →Diagnostics The types of programming histories include OEM, Customer data programming,
Programming programming history for each →Programming History Vehicle data programming and Fleet data programming.
Histories of the controllers.
Viewing the Allows the user to view the →Diagnostics Refer to the Maintenance Monitor section in CUSTOMER DATA
Maintenance status of the Maintenance →Maintenance Data Log Display PROGRAMMING for more information concerning maintenance schedules.
Data Log Monitor schedule (i.e., Before
Next and Since Last). If the Predictive Oil Change feature (see Predictive Oil Change) is installed and
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

enabled, the Oil & Filter Change maintenance item data will be replaced with
Predictive Oil Change maintenance item data.
If the GuardDog™ maintenance function (see GuardDog™ Enabled) is
enabled, the status of the GuardDog™ maintenance items will be displayed at
the bottom of the log, following the 15 standard Maintenance items. Please see
table on page 34.

Page 43
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 44
Viewing the Allows the user to view the →Diagnostics NOTE: If the ignition is cycled — turned OFF and then ON again — while
Switch Status current status of all V-MAC →Switch Status Display monitoring the switch status, the display update will stop and an error message
Display control switches. This feature will appear.
is useful for diagnosing wiring
problems. If the switch has been reassigned (using the Switch Assignments feature in
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING), the logical status of the new operation
The first column of the Switch will be displayed.
Status display screen shows
the physical status. This Example: If the Engine Brake Low switch on the instrument panel is in the ON
reflects the primary operation position, the Switch Status display screen should indicate that the physical
of the switch. status of the switch (Engine Brake Low) is “On”.

The second column shows the Now assume that the Engine Brake Low switch has been reassigned to function
logical status. This reflects any as the PTO 3 switch. In this case, the physical status of Engine Brake Low
additional operations that the should be “On,” however the logical status of Engine Brake Low should be “Off”
switch performs. and the logical status of PTO 3 should be “Engaged”.
If the Brake Pad sensors (see GuardDog™ Enabled) are installed as part of the
GuardDog™ maintenance feature, the physical switches — Aux.1 and Spare —
are replaced with brake pads, front and brake pads, rear, respectively.
The Air Restriction switch, Washer Fluid Level switch, and the Parking Brake 2
switch have been added to the physical switch list (for Step 8 and higher VECU
s/w, see table on page 34).
Viewing the Allows the user to view life and →Diagnostics For a summary of vehicle life and trip information, refer to the DataMax™
Vehicle Data vehicle trip information. →Vehicle Data Log Display Summary Information.
Log
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Wiggle Wire Enables Wiggle Wire Mode. →Special Diagnostic Modes For Step 5 systems, the Wiggle Wire Test is supported in the VECU only. For
Test This test increases the →Wiggle Wire Test Step 8 and higher VECU and EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for
system’s sensitivity to faults on ASET™ AC engines), the Wiggle Wire Test is supported in both the VECU and
sensors and wiring. When EECU. This test helps to shorten the diagnostic times on the following VECU-
troubleshooting an intermittent supported sensors:
problem, placing the system in
Wiggle Wire Mode — and then 앫 Accelerator Pedal: J3-4, J3-5, J3-6
“wiggling” the wires in the 앫 Electronic Malfunction Lamp: J3-9
vicinity of the offending sensor
or circuit while monitoring 앫 Engine Shutdown Lamp: J3-8
faults — will help identify the 앫 Exhaust Temperature: J2-7, J2-8
problem circuit.
앫 Front Drive Axle Temperature: J2-1, J2-3
앫 Rear Drive Axle Temperature: J2-4, J2-1
앫 Fuel Level: J1-18
앫 Road Speed Sensor: J2-11, J2-12
앫 Speedometer: J1-3
앫 Tachometer: J1-4
앫 Transmission Oil Temperature: J2-1, J2-2
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Page 45
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 46
Wiggle Wire For Step 8 and higher EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for ASET™
Test AC engines), this test helps to shorten the diagnostic times on the following
(continued) EECU-supported sensors (please refer to above list for VECU-supported
sensors):
앫 *Aftercooler Outlet Air Temperature: J2-84
앫 Ambient Air Temperature: J2-27, J2-29, *J2-68
앫 *Boost Pressure: J2-35, J2-49, J2-50
앫 *Combustion Air Humidity-Temperature: J2-30, J2-47, J2-83 (for Air
Humidity) and J2-65 (for Air Temperature)
앫 *Compressor Discharge Temperature: J2-67, J2-85
앫 Coolant Temperature: J1-17, J1-26, *J2-86, *J2-87
앫 *EGR Valve Drive: J2-16, J2-17
앫 Engine Coolant Level: *J1-11, *J1-12, *J1-13, J2-3, J2-26
앫 Engine Oil Level: J1-1, J1-13, *J2-21, *J2-22
앫 Engine Oil Pressure: J1-25, J1-32, J1-34, *J2-25, *J2-28, *J2-45
앫 Engine Oil Temperature: J1-5, J1-26, *J2-64, *J2-81, *J2-82
앫 Exhaust Brake: J1-39
앫 Fan Clutch: J1-9
앫 Fuel Temperature: J1-26, J1-28, *J2-81
앫 Inlet Air Pressure: J1-15, J1-35, J1-36
앫 Inlet Manifold Temperature: J1-2, J1-26, *J2-61, *J2-80
앫 *VTG Turbocharger Vane Position: J2-26, J2-51, J2-69
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

앫 Wastegate Output: J1-8

* For Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for ASET™ AC engines only.
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DataMax™ Summary Information
DataMax™ vehicle life and trip data summary
information is defined/calculated according to the
following chart.

DataMax™ Item Definition/Calculation

Active Fault Occurrences Number of times an Engine or Vehicle ECU fault was active.
Active Fault Time Amount of time an Engine or Vehicle ECU fault was active.
Average Cruise Speed Cruise distance ÷ cruise time
Average Driving Speed Distance ÷ vehicle moving time
Average Speed Distance ÷ key switch ON occurrences
Cranking Time (Steps 5–9)** Amount of time that the starter was ON.
Cruise Fuel Economy Cruise distance ÷ cruise fuel
Delayed Idle Fuel + Fuel consumed during delayed (qualified) idle.
Delayed Idle Time + Amount of time that a delayed (qualified) idle occurred.
Delayed (qualified) idle is the time that the vehicle idles after
exceeding the Idle Logging Delay threshold.
Distance Distance covered by the vehicle (all conditions).
Distance in Cruise Control Distance covered while cruise control was active.
Distance Traveled in Engine Sweet Spot @ Distance traveled while engine is running at its most efficient
speed.
Driving Fuel Economy Distance ÷ vehicle moving fuel
Engine Overspeed Company Threshold — Max Maximum engine speed exceeded over the Engine
Overspeed, Company Limit threshold, yet was below the
Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold. Life information only.
Engine Overspeed Company Threshold Time Amount of time that engine speed exceeded the Engine
Overspeed, Company Limit threshold, yet was below the
Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold.
NOTE: The company threshold is the value that the driver is
instructed not to exceed, usually to promote good fuel
economy.
Engine Revolutions** Engine revolutions (within 100).
Engine Running Fuel Fuel consumed by the engine.
Engine Running Time Amount of time that the engine was running.
Fan Clutch Cycles Number of times the fan turned ON. Life information only.
Fuel Used in Cruise Control Fuel consumed while cruise control was active.
Fuel Used in Engine Sweet Spot @ Amount of fuel used while engine is running at its most
efficient speed.
Fueled Engine Overspeed Time* Amount of time that engine speed exceeded the Engine
Overspeed with Fuel threshold while fuel was being delivered
to the engine, either via cruise control or the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: This value will continue to log, even if the engine
speed exceeds the Engine Overspeed, All Conditions or
Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold, provided that fuel is
still being delivered to the engine.

Page 47
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DataMax™ Item Definition/Calculation
Fueled Vehicle Overspeed Time Amount of time that vehicle speed exceeded the Vehicle
Overspeed with Fuel threshold while fuel was being delivered
to the engine, either via cruise control or the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: This value will continue to log, even if the vehicle
speed exceeds the Vehicle Overspeed, All Conditions
threshold, provided that fuel is still being delivered to the
engine.
Hand Throttle Distance Distance traveled while the hand throttle was active.
Hand Throttle Fuel Fuel consumed while the hand throttle was active.
Hand Throttle Time Amount of time that the hand throttle was active. Hand
throttle is considered active when speed control is active, all
four PTOs are OFF and vehicle speed is less than the Hand
Throttle Max Road Speed threshold.
Hard Braking Occurrences Number of times that vehicle deceleration exceeded the Hard
Braking threshold.
Idle Fuel Fuel consumed during idle.
Idle Time Engine is running and vehicle speed is zero.
Key Switch ON Occurrences** Number of times that the ECU was powered up.
Maximum Engine Speed* Maximum engine speed for the current vehicle trip and life of
the vehicle. Life information only.
Maximum Vehicle Speed* Maximum vehicle speed for the current vehicle trip and life of
the vehicle. Life information only.
Moving PTO 1 Distance Distance covered while PTO 1 was ON, the engine was
running, and the vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 1 Fuel** Fuel used while PTO 1 was ON, the engine was running, and
the vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 1 Time** Time that PTO 1 was ON, the engine was running, and the
vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 2 Distance Distance covered while PTO 2 was ON, the engine was
running, and the vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 2 Fuel** Fuel consumed while PTO 2 was ON, the engine was
running, and the vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 2 Time** Time that PTO 2 was ON, the engine was running, and the
vehicle was moving.
PTO 1 Fuel Fuel used while PTO 1 was ON and the engine was running
(includes Moving PTO 1 Fuel).
PTO 1 Time Amount of time that PTO 1 was ON and the engine was
running (includes Moving PTO 1 Time). PTO speed control
does not have to be ON.
PTO 2 Fuel Fuel used while PTO 2 was ON and the engine was running
(includes Moving PTO 2 Fuel).
PTO 2 Time Amount of time that PTO 2 was ON and the engine was
running (includes Moving PTO 2 Time). PTO speed control
does not have to be ON.
Severe Engine Overspeed Occurrences Number of times that engine speed exceeded the Engine
Overspeed (Severe) threshold (indicating abuse of the
engine). Life information only.
Severe Engine Overspeed — Max Value Maximum engine speed in excess of the Engine Overspeed
(Severe) threshold (indicating abuse of the engine). Life
information only.

Page 48
 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DataMax™ Item Definition/Calculation
Time in Cruise Control Amount of time that cruise control was active. With the
exception of Step 6 and earlier systems, cruise control is not
considered active when it is cancelled with the clutch or
service brake.
Time in Sweet Spot Amount of time while engine is running at its most efficient
speed.
Total Fuel All fuel used.
Total Fuel Economy Distance ÷ total fuel
Traction Loss Occurrences Number of times that vehicle acceleration exceeded the
Traction Loss threshold.
True Idle Fuel** Fuel used during true idle.
True Idle Time** Amount of time that a true idle occurred. During true idle:
PTO 1 and PTO 2 are OFF, speed control is disabled, the
engine is running, accelerator pedal position is less than 2%
and vehicle speed is 0 mph.
NOTE: PTO 3 and PTO 4 are not considered when
calculating true idle.
Vehicle Moving Fuel Fuel consumed while the vehicle is moving.
Vehicle Moving Time Amount of time that the vehicle was moving.
Vehicle Overspeed — Max Maximum vehicle speed in excess of the Vehicle Overspeed,
All Conditions threshold. Life information only.
Vehicle Overspeed Occurrences Number of times that vehicle speed exceeded the Vehicle
Overspeed, All Conditions threshold.
Vehicle Overspeed Time Amount of time that vehicle speed exceeded the Vehicle
Overspeed, All Conditions threshold.
Vehicle Time Amount of time that the key was in the ON position.
% Cruise Distance (Cruise distance ÷ distance) x 100
% Cruise Fuel (Cruise fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Cruise Time (Cruise time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% Delayed Idle Fuel (Delayed idle fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Delayed Idle Time (Delayed idle time ÷ total time) x 100
% Distance in Sweet Spot Sweet Spot distance ÷ distance
% Driving Time (Vehicle moving time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% Fuel Used in Sweet Spot (Sweet Spot fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Idle Fuel (Idle fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Idle Time (Idle time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% PTO Distance — All* ([Sum of all PTO moving distance] x 100) ÷ distance
% PTO Fuel — All ([PTO 1 fuel ÷ PTO 2 fuel] x 100) ÷ total fuel
% PTO Time — All ([PTO 1 time ÷ PTO 2 time] x 100) ÷ key switch ON
occurrences
% Time in Sweet Spot (Sweet Spot time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% True Idle Fuel** (True idle fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% True Idle Time** (True idle time ÷ vehicle time) x 100

+ Delayed Idle is defined as the total amount of idle time that is accumulated after a predefined delay period has expired. This
is intended for future use in driver incentive programs where an appropriate amount of “free idle” time is granted due to traffic
lights, etc.
* Items are not available on V-MAC III 1MS312/312A software.
** Items are not available on V-MAC III 1MS369 (VECU s/w). Can be restored using InfoMax™ 4.0 software.
@ Items are not available on V-MAC III 1MS312/312A or 1MS316/316A software.

Page 49
 NOTES

Page 50
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 51
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA Password Protection
PROGRAMMING ENTERING THE PASSWORD
INTRODUCTION 49

About Customer Data Programming

The V-MAC system offers a variety of customer
options and features which can be programmed
using CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING.

Although this version of CUSTOMER DATA

PROGRAMMING can be used to program both
V-MAC II and V-MAC III systems, the
programming instructions contained in this
manual were designed to support V-MAC III. For Figure 49 — Password Entry Screen
V-MAC II user information, refer to the online help
and the V-MAC II User Guide (8-302). Many of the options available in CUSTOMER
DATA PROGRAMMING are protected by a
Programming Access security screen. To access
Accessing Customer Data the selected option, enter the appropriate
Programming password.

There are two ways to access CUSTOMER DATA A password can be any combination of numbers
PROGRAMMING. and/or letters and is not case sensitive. However,
the password will be transferred to the vehicle in
앫 If there is a Mack Software folder on the upper case regardless if lower or higher case
desktop, double-click on the folder. Then letters are used. There are four different types of
select the CUSTOMER DATA passwords organized according to where the
PROGRAMMING icon. information is stored.
앫 If there is no icon on the desktop, access the
start menu, select Programs and select For information stored in the vehicle ECU, there
Mack Programs. Then select Customer are three areas for passwords:
Data Programming. 앫 Vehicle Data
앫 Customer Data
Online Help Function
앫 Fleet Data
This version of V-MAC support software features
an online help function (similar to Windows Help). For information stored in the engine ECU, there is
The online help includes all of the information one area for password:
contained in this user guide. Simply press F1 to 앫 Customer Data
view the help topics.
Once the appropriate password has been entered
Additional Information into the field, click on the OK button to continue
programming.
The current V-MAC III Service Manual, 8-211,
provides a complete description of the operation
of the V-MAC III system, as well as instructions
for performing diagnostics and repairs of system
components.

The phone number for the V-MAC Software

Support Center is (800) 247-0039. Hours are
8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (Eastern time), Monday
through Friday.

Page 52
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CHANGING THE PASSWORD CUSTOMER DATA
To change the current password, enter the PROGRAMMING VISUAL
current password into the field and click on the IDENTIFICATION
box next to the Change Password field.
50
Refer to Customer Data Programming for
Windows (Version 2.8) Feature Location Flow
Chart for V-MAC III, Step 2 (8-358-2) and above
for an overview of CUSTOMER DATA
PROGRAMMING features and functions.

Screen Summaries
Whenever Customer Data Programming (or
Service Diagnostics) is started, a pop-up screen
Figure 50 — Password Change Screen will appear displaying the type of datalink
connection being used. Below is an example of
1. Enter the new password in the New the RP1210A connection. Click on the OK button
Password field. to acknowledge the message. The Customer
Data Programming Main Menu will appear
2. Re-enter the new password in the Verify (please refer to Figure 52).
Password field. 51

3. Click on the OK button.

Figure 51 — Datalink Connection Message (Using

RP1210A Connection)

If a different datalink adapter is desired, please

refer to the “UTILITIES MENU” on page 13 for
instructions.

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING MENU

The Customer Data Programming Menu offers

you 10 choices.

Page 53
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Click on the Program Fleet Data button to
52

program fleet parameters (refer to “FLEET DATA

MENU” on page 56).

Click on the Edit Owner Storage button to edit

the Owner Storage entry form (refer to “EDIT
OWNER STORAGE ENTRY FORM” on page 57).

Click on the Maintenance Monitor button to

program Maintenance Monitor schedules (refer to
“MAINTENANCE MONITOR ENTRY FORM” on
page 57).

Click on the Program Unit Pump Calibration

button to calibrate the unit pumps (refer to “UNIT
PUMP CALIBRATION ENTRY FORM” on page
60).
Figure 52 — Customer Data Programming Menu
Click on the Set Time and Date button to set the
VECU time and date (refer to “SET TIME AND
DATE SCREEN” on page 60).
A line in the lower right side of the screen
displays information concerning the type of Click on the Preferences button to set the
engine installed. If an Eaton® Super 10 Top 2 or configuration of the software (refer to
Allison HD transmission is installed, that “PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM” on page 14 in
information will also be displayed. Service Diagnostics).

Click on the Quit button to exit the program.

VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION SCREEN

A line in the lower left side of the screen displays
the Programming Tool ID hard drive serial The View/Print Report Selection screen,
number, used for programming history. accessed from the Customer Data Programming
Menu, lets you view and/or print the current
customer parameters which are stored in the
Click on the View/Print Current Parameters V-MAC module. No password is needed to select
button to view or print current parameters (refer to this option because only viewing, not modifying,
“VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION SCREEN” the data is allowed.
53
on page 54).

Click on the Program Vehicle Component

Parameters button to program vehicle
component parameters (refer to “PROGRAM
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS ENTRY
FORM” on page 55).

Click on the Customer Data/Vehicle ECU button

to program customer parameters stored in the
vehicle ECU (refer to “VEHICLE ECU
CUSTOMER DATA MENU” on page 55).

Click on the Customer Data/Engine ECU button

to program customer parameters stored in the
engine ECU (refer to “ENGINE ECU CUSTOMER
DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 56).
Figure 53 — View/Print Report Screen

Page 54
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Click on the Select Report to View button to call PROGRAM VEHICLE COMPONENT
up the Select Report to View pop-up screen. PARAMETERS ENTRY FORM
54
Click on the View button to see the current
selection.

Click on the Print/Save Report(s) button to print

the current selection.
앫 Select Vehicle Data & Settings to view/print
the Vehicle Data & Settings display screen.
앫 Select General & Vocational Settings to
view/print the General & Vocational Settings
display screen.
앫 Select Cruise Control Parameters to view/
print the Cruise Control Parameters display
screen.
앫 Select Electronic Hand Throttle
Parameters to view/print the Electronic Figure 54 — Program Vehicle Component Parameters
Hand Throttle Parameters display screen. Entry Form
앫 Select PTO Parameters to view/print the
PTO Parameters display screen. This entry form, accessed from the Customer
Data Programming Menu, is used to program
앫 Select Shutdown Parameters to view/print various vehicle component parameters and
the Shutdown Parameters display screen. features. The allowable limits for each feature are
앫 Select Cab Fan Controls to view/print the displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
Cab Fan Controls display screen. detailed features descriptions, refer to the
“VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS” table
앫 Select Fleet Data Settings to view/print the on page 71.
Fleet Data Settings display screen.
앫 Select Engine ECU Customer Data to view/ VEHICLE ECU CUSTOMER DATA MENU
print the Engine ECU Customer Data display
screen. The Vehicle ECU Customer Data Menu,
accessed from the Customer Data Programming
앫 Select Driver Incentive Information to Menu, offers you nine choices in where you can
view/print Driver Incentive Information. program features and options associated with
customer data.
Click on the Cancel button to return to the 55

Customer Data Programming menu.

Figure 55 — Vehicle ECU Customer Data Menu

Page 55
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Click on the General Features button to program Click on the Return to main menu button to
general features (refer to “GENERAL FEATURES return to the Customer Data Programming menu.
ENTRY FORM” on page 61).
ENGINE ECU CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM
Click on the Shutdown Options button to
56
program shutdown options (refer to “SHUTDOWN
OPTIONS ENTRY FORM” on page 61).

Click on the Vocational Features button to

program vocation features (refer to
“VOCATIONAL FEATURES ENTRY FORM” on
page 61).

Click on the Cab Fan Control Options button to

program cab fan controls (refer to “CAB FAN
CONTROLS ENTRY FORM” on page 62).

Cab Fan Control options are only available for

Step 5 and above.
Figure 56 — Engine ECU Customer Data Entry Form
Click on the Program Cruise Control button to
program cruise control options (refer to “CRUISE This entry form, accessed from the Customer
CONTROL OPTIONS ENTRY FORM” on page Data Programming Menu, is used to program
62). parameters stored in the EECU. The allowable
limits for each feature are displayed at the bottom
of the screen. For detailed feature descriptions,
refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/EECU
FEATURES” table on page 99.
When Program Cruise Control Options is
selected, a program status screen may appear.
This is a warning to make sure that PTO 2 is FLEET DATA MENU
turned OFF before changing cruise settings. The Fleet Data Menu, accessed from the
Customer Data Programming Menu, offers six
Click on the Electronic Hand Throttle Settings choices where you can program parameters and
button to program electronic hand throttle settings settings associated with fleet data.
57
(refer to “ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE
SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on page 62).

Click on the PTO Speed Control Settings button

to program standard settings for all PTOs (refer to
“PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS ENTRY
FORM” on page 63).

Click on the PTO 1-2 Custom Control Settings

button to program custom settings for PTO 1 and
PTO 2 (refer to “PTO 1-2 CUSTOM SETTINGS
ENTRY FORM” on page 63).

Click on the PTO 3-4 Custom Control Settings

button to program custom settings for PTO 3 and
PTO 4 (refer to “PTO 3-4 CUSTOM SETTINGS
ENTRY FORM” on page 63).
Figure 57 — Fleet Data Menu

Page 56
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Click on the Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings This entry form, accessed from the Customer
button to program theft deterrence parameters Data Programming Menu, is used to store
(refer to “THEFT DETERRENCE PARAMETERS customer information. For detailed instructions,
ENTRY FORM” on page 64). refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
FUNCTIONS” table on page 70.
Click on the Fleet Display and Trip Settings
button to program display and trip settings (refer
MAINTENANCE MONITOR ENTRY FORM
to “FLEET DISPLAY AND TRIP PARAMETERS
ENTRY FORM” on page 64). The Maintenance Monitor entry form, accessed
from the Customer Data Programming Menu,
Click on the Fleet Driver Event Settings button allows you to set maintenance intervals according
to program driver event settings (refer to “FLEET to distance, engine hour or date. Or, if desired,
DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on set the maintenance items to the Mack defaults.
page 65). 59

Click on the Incident Log Filter and Trigger

Settings button to program incident log filter and
trigger settings (refer to “INCIDENT LOG FILTER
AND TRIGGER SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on
page 65).

Click on the Maintenance Customer Defined

Labels button to program the customer defined
labels that are used in the Maintenance Monitor
(refer to “MAINTENANCE CUSTOMER
DEFINED LABELS ENTRY FORM” on page 65).

Click on the Driver ID Settings button to program

driver ID settings (refer to “DRIVER ID
SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on page 66).
Figure 59 — Maintenance Monitor Entry Form
Click on the Return to main menu button to
return to the Customer Data Programming menu. To change an item, type in the appropriate field
and click on the Save/Exit button to save data in
the module. Or click on the Load Defaults button
EDIT OWNER STORAGE ENTRY FORM to view and choose from three predefined
58 maintenance intervals (Line Haul Type 1 Defaults,
Line Haul Type 2 Defaults or Short Haul
Defaults).
60

Figure 60 — Mack Maintenance Defaults

Click on the appropriate radio button (e.g., click

on “Line Haul Type 1 Defaults). To accept the
change, click on the Set Defaults button or click
on the Cancel button to not accept the change.
Figure 58 — Edit Owner Storage Entry Form

Page 57
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
The table below lists the available maintenance
items and parameter ranges.

Maintenance Item Interval Type Range

Oil Change Distance 0 or 10,000 to 70,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 200 to 1000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 180 days
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Oil Change and Filter Distance 0 or 10,000 to 70,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 200 to 1000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 180 days
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Fuel Filter Distance 0 or 10,000 to 70,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 200 to 1000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 180 days
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Air Filter Distance 0 or 10,000 to 100,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 250 to 5000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 18 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Belts Distance 0 or 10,000 to 200,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 250 to 10,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 30 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Coolant Conditioner Distance 0 or 10,000 to 70,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 200 to 1000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 180 days
Date Alarm 0 to 255%

Page 58
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Maintenance Item Interval Type Range
Engine Coolant Distance 0 or 50,000 to 200,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 1000 to 10,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 or 6 to 30 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Clutch Lube Distance 0 or 10,000 to 30,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 to 300 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 3 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Chassis Lube Distance 0 or 10,000 to 40,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 200 to 400 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 or 1 to 6 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Power Steering Distance 0 or 10,000 to 100,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 1000 to 10,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 18 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Turbo/Injectors Distance 0 or 50,000 to 200,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 1000 to 10,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 or 6 to 30 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Gear Oil Distance 0 or 250,000 to 600,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 1600 to 10,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 or 12 to 48 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%
Fan Clutch Distance 0 or 25,000 to 500,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 or 1000 to 50,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 72 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%

Page 59
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Maintenance Item Interval Type Range
Customer Defined 1/2 Distance 0 to 600,000 miles
Distance Alarm 0 to 255%
Engine Hours 0 to 10,000 hours
Hours Alarm 0 to 255%
Date 0 to 72 months
Date Alarm 0 to 255%

UNIT PUMP CALIBRATION ENTRY FORM These entry forms, accessed from the Customer
61 Data Programming Menu, are used to enter the
unit pump calibration codes. For detailed
instructions, refer to “CUSTOMER DATA
PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS” table on page
70.

SET TIME AND DATE SCREEN

63

Figure 61 — Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form (ASET™

AI Engine) Figure 63 — Set Time and Date Screen

Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form (for ASET™ This screen, accessed from the Customer Data
AC Engine) Programming Menu, is used to set the vehicle
62
time and date to the PC time and date. For
detailed instructions, refer to the “CUSTOMER
DATA PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS” table on
page 70.

The time and date settings are not retained in

VECU memory if power to the VECU is lost (for
example, when the vehicle battery or the harness
connector is disconnected). Therefore, when
power is restored to the VECU (for example,
reconnecting the battery or the VECU harness
connector), reset the time and date before
returning the vehicle to service.

Figure 62 — Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form (ASET™

AC Engine)

Page 60
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

The V.I.P.™ time setting can be changed using For vehicles with Step 4 or Step 5 (1MS38P2 and
the V.I.P.™ display without affecting the VECU 1MS317 EECU) software, be sure to disable the
time and date settings. Idle Shutdown parameter in Customer Data
Programming prior to programming the modules.
Failure to do so may result in possible
GENERAL FEATURES ENTRY FORM programming failure and damage to the modules.
64

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU

Customer Data Menu, is used to program idle
shutdown. When applicable, the allowable limits
for a feature are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
the “CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN
OPTIONS” table on page 79.

VOCATIONAL FEATURES ENTRY FORM

66

Figure 64 — General Features Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU

Customer Data Menu, is used to program general
features stored in the VECU. When applicable,
the allowable limits for a feature are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — GENERAL FEATURES” table on page
76.

SHUTDOWN OPTIONS ENTRY FORM

Figure 66 — Vocational Features Entry Form
65

Figure 65 — Shutdown Options Entry Form

Page 61
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
68

Customer Data Menu, is used to program

vocational features stored in the VECU. When
applicable, the allowable limits for a feature are
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
detailed features descriptions, refer to the
“CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — VOCATIONAL
FEATURES” table on page 84.

CAB FAN CONTROLS ENTRY FORM

67

Figure 68 — Cruise Control Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU

Customer Data Menu, is used to program cruise
control. When applicable, the allowable limits for
a feature are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
the “CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE
CONTROL FEATURES” table on page 87.

ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE SETTINGS

Figure 67 — Cab Fan Controls Entry Form
ENTRY FORM
69
This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
Customer Data Menu, is used to program cab fan
parameters stored in the VECU. When
applicable, the allowable limits for a feature are
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
detailed feature descriptions, refer to the
“CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CAB FAN
CONTROLS” table on page 86.

This option is available for Step 5 and above

systems only.

CRUISE CONTROL OPTIONS ENTRY FORM

Figure 69 — Electronic Hand Throttle Settings Entry
Form

When this option is selected, a program status

screen may appear. This is a warning to make
sure that PTO 2 is turned OFF before changing
cruise settings.

Page 62
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU PTO 1-2 CUSTOM SETTINGS ENTRY FORM
Customer Data Menu, is used to program the 71
electronic hand throttle. When applicable, the
allowable limits for a feature are displayed at the
bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE
(EHT) FEATURES” table on page 90.

PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS ENTRY

FORM
70

Figure 71 — PTO 1-2 Custom Settings Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU

Customer Data Menu, is used to program custom
settings for PTO 1 and PTO 2. When applicable,
the allowable limits for each feature are displayed
at the bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS” table on
page 95.
Figure 70 — PTO Speed Control Settings Entry Form
PTO 3-4 CUSTOM SETTINGS ENTRY FORM
This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU 72

Customer Data Menu, is used to program

standard features for each PTO. When
applicable, the allowable limits for a feature are
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
detailed feature descriptions, refer to the
“CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED
CONTROL SETTINGS” table on page 93.

Figure 72 — PTO 3-4 Custom Settings Entry Form

Page 63
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU FLEET DISPLAY AND TRIP PARAMETERS
Customer Data Menu, is used to program custom ENTRY FORM
settings for PTO 3 and PTO 4. When applicable, 74
the allowable limits for a feature are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS” table on
page 95.

THEFT DETERRENCE PARAMETERS ENTRY

FORM
73

Figure 74 — Fleet Display and Trip Parameters Entry

Form

The following Driver Incentive dialog window will

appear. If you enable the Driver Incentive
parameter, you must also set the related incentive
Road Speed Limit (in the Program Vehicle
Figure 73 — Theft Deterrence Parameters Entry Form Component Parameters entry form) and Cruise
(in the Customer Data/Vehicle ECU, Program
This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data Cruise Control entry form) parameters.
Menu, is used to program theft deterrence
75
parameters. When applicable, the allowable limits
for a feature are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
the “FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE
FEATURES” table on page 103.
Figure 75 — Driver Incentive Dialog Window

This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data

Menu, is used to view fleet display and program
trip parameters. When applicable, the allowable
limits for a feature are displayed at the bottom of
the screen. For detailed feature descriptions,
refer to the “FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP
SETTINGS” table on page 105.

Page 64
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
FLEET DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS ENTRY This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data
FORM Menu, is used to program incident log filter and
76 trigger settings. When applicable, the allowable
limits for a feature are displayed at the bottom of
the screen. Vehicle Incidents contain information
about how a vehicle was being driven before and
after conditions have been detected by the
V-MAC module, suggesting that an accident or
other catastrophic event has occurred. This entry
form is used in conjunction with InfoMax™ (if
available) to provide reports.

A data logger generates the incident report on

board the vehicle. During normal operation, a
sample of vehicle speed, engine speed and the
state of up to eight switches are stored at a
programmable rate. This rate can be set using
Customer Data Programming. At another
programmable rate, the data logger determines
Figure 76 — Fleet Driver Event Settings Entry Form vehicle and engine speed by watching for a
change in vehicle speed greater than 10 mph/sec
This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data or engine speed greater than 50 rpm/sec. If both
Menu, is used to program driver event settings. are detected, an incident report is triggered. For
When applicable, the allowable limits for a feature more information, refer to the “FLEET DATA —
are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Driver INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER
events are records of things that drivers do during SETTINGS” table on page 118.
the normal course of their jobs. For example,
Driver Event data can report on how well drivers MAINTENANCE CUSTOMER DEFINED
obey road and engine speed limits. This entry LABELS ENTRY FORM
form is used in conjunction with InfoMax™ (if 78
available) to provide reports. For more
information, refer to the “FLEET DATA — DRIVER
EVENT SETTINGS” table on page 116.

INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER

SETTINGS ENTRY FORM
77

Figure 78 — Maintenance Customer Defined Labels

Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data

Menu, is used to program customer defined
labels. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
the “FLEET DATA — CUSTOMER DEFINED
LABELS” table on page 120.
Figure 77 — Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings
Entry Form

Page 65
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
DRIVER ID SETTINGS ENTRY FORM
79

A line in the lower right side of the screen shows

that a Cummins Engine is installed.

A line in the lower left side of the screen displays

the Programming Tool ID hard drive serial
number, used for programming history.

This menu lists the available programming

options for a vehicle equipped with a Cummins
engine.

Click on the View/Print Current Parameters

Figure 79 — Driver ID Settings Entry Form button to view or print current parameters (refer to
“CUMMINS VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION
This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data SCREEN” on page 67).
Menu, is used to program driver ID and access
level restrictions for each driver ID. For detailed Click on the Program Vehicle Component
feature descriptions, refer to the “FLEET DATA — Parameters button to program vehicle
DRIVER ID SETTINGS” table on page 120. component parameters (refer to “CUMMINS
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS ENTRY
Cummins Screen Summaries FORM” on page 67).

The following screens will appear if the vehicle is Click on the Edit Owner Storage button to edit
equipped with a Cummins engine. the Owner Storage entry form (refer to “EDIT
OWNER STORAGE ENTRY FORM” on page 57).
CUMMINS CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Click on the Set Time and Date button to set the
MENU
VECU time and date (refer to “SET TIME AND
80
DATE SCREEN” on page 60).

Click on the Utilities button to set the

configuration.

Click on the Quit button to exit the program.

Figure 80 — Cummins Customer Data Programming

Menu

Page 66
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUMMINS VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION CUMMINS VEHICLE COMPONENT
SCREEN PARAMETERS ENTRY FORM
81 82

Figure 81 — Cummins View/Print Selection Screen Figure 82 — Vehicle Component Parameters Entry Form

Click on the Select Report to View button to call This entry form is used to program various
up the Select Report to View pop-up screen. vehicle component parameters and features. The
allowable limits for each feature are displayed at
Click on the View button to view the current the bottom of the screen.
selection.

Click on the Print/Save Report(s) button to print

the current selection.
앫 Select Vehicle Data & Settings to view/print
the Vehicle Data & Settings display screen.

Click on the Cancel button to return to the

Customer Data Programming menu.

Page 67
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA Limited Power Access
PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION This type of access code allows the operator to
AND OPERATION start the vehicle, but the vehicle will have
restricted power.
Theft Deterrence System Summary
Limited Speed Access
The V-MAC III system has the ability to limit
unauthorized vehicle use by requiring the driver This type of access code allows the operator to
to enter an access code through the dash display start the vehicle, but the vehicle will have
unit. restricted road speed.

SECURITY MODES Theft Access

The V-MAC III theft deterrence system offers two This type of access code allows the operator
security modes for continued running. (usually a thief) to start and drive the vehicle with
full power. However, the engine will shut down
Limited Power Mode after a specified time or distance. This level of
access is designed for emergency situations.
When this mode is enabled, the vehicle will start After the driver gives this code to a thief, the
without a valid access code but will only run at vehicle will start and drive normally, but the
limited power. There is no time limit with this vehicle will shut down and can be recovered
mode, but engine power will be restricted. To use without endangering personnel.
this mode of security, enable the Demand Driver
ID to Operate feature (refer to the “FLEET DATA
— THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES” table on Maintenance Monitor Summary
page 103).
The V-MAC III system monitors maintenance
intervals and issues alerts for a variety of items.
Limited Time Mode
In particular, the Maintenance Monitor system:
When this mode is enabled, the vehicle will start 앫 Allows the user to set maintenance intervals.
without a valid access code but will shut down
앫 Monitors maintenance thresholds.
after 30 seconds unless a valid access code is
entered. In addition, engine power can be 앫 Broadcasts maintenance alerts to the driver.
restricted for the initial 30-second period. With
this mode of security, there is a time limit and If installed, GuardDog™, an active monitoring
engine power is restricted. To use this mode of feature of V-MAC, tracks real-time occurrences
security, enable the Demand ID to Continue that require maintenance. GuardDog™
Running Beyond 30 Seconds feature (refer to the determines when maintenance for a selected
“FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE item is needed, using various sensor inputs and
FEATURES” table on page 103). algorithms. The driver is notified of maintenance
through the electronic dash or the V.I.P.™.
GuardDog™ and the Maintenance Monitor
ACCESS LEVEL RESTRICTIONS
system can work separately or together.
The driver access code can be programmed with
specific restrictions, regardless of the security
mode selected. Four different levels of access are
available: GuardDog™ is available for CH, CV and CX
model chassis. The vehicle must be equipped
Full Access with a version 4.0 V.I.P.™ (1MS351 or higher
software) and a VECU with 1MS349 for E-Tech™
This type of access code has no restrictions on engines or 1MS364 for ASET™ AI engines to
power, driving time or distance. support the sensors GuardDog™ uses to monitor
the vehicle systems.

Page 68
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
BROADCASTING MAINTENANCE ALERTS
As soon as a maintenance alert is issued, it is
GuardDog™ is not available for MR and LE broadcast to the driver (unless Alert Blackout
models or vehicles with an ASET™ AC engine. mode is currently enabled). To program Alert
Blackout mode parameters, refer to page 114.

PROGRAMMING MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

The Maintenance Monitor system provides three If Alert Blackout mode is enabled at the time that
methods for programming maintenance intervals: the alert is issued, the alert will be held until the
앫 Setting custom maintenance intervals using Alert Blackout Stop Time, GMT threshold is
the Maintenance Monitor entry form. reached. Once this threshold is reached, the alert
will be broadcast to the driver.
앫 Setting maintenance intervals to MACK
defaults using the Load Defaults selection
in the Maintenance Monitor entry form. After the initial broadcast, the maintenance alert
will be broadcast every time the vehicle is started
앫 Setting oil change intervals using driving
(until maintenance is performed and the alert is
habits. Predictive Oil Change can only be
reset).
set in Service Diagnostics.
In addition, reminders can also be programmed
MONITORING MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS for scheduled times throughout the day.
The V-MAC III system monitors the status of each
of the maintenance items. Once the maintenance
threshold is reached, an alert is issued.

Page 69
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS
Function Description Location/Password Instructions

Page 70
Edit Owner Allows the user to enter Location Type in the desired information in the field and click on the Save/Exit button.
Storage information such as major →Edit Owner Storage Limited to 128 characters spacing.
component part numbers and Password
dates of repair. Vehicle Data (VECU)
Maintenance Allows the user to set Location 1. Type in the distance, engine hour or date interval for each item.
Monitor maintenance intervals →Maintenance Monitor 2. If a maintenance alarm is desired, enter the appropriate percent for each
Schedule according to distance, engine Password interval.
hour or date. Fleet Data (VECU) Example: If the distance interval is set at 10,000 miles and the distance
A maintenance alarm can also alarm interval is set at 80%, the alarm will be issued at 8,000 miles (8,000
be set for each interval. This is 80% of 10,000). An alarm of 85% is set when Predictive Oil Change is
alarm is based on a enabled. Customers can change this.
percentage of the interval. 3. Click on the Save/Exit button.
NOTE: To set maintenance intervals to MACK defaults, click on the Load
Defaults button and select the appropriate option.
NOTE: If Predictive Oil Change is enabled, all oil change items are disabled.
Also, all Oil Change & Filter items, except for Distance Alarm, are disabled.
Unit Pump Calibrates the Electronic Unit Location 1. Select the unit pump cylinder location.
Calibration Pumps (EUPs). →Program Unit Pump Calibration 2. Type in the four-digit calibration code (and pump serial # for ASET™ AC
Password engines).
None 3. Click on the Save/Exit button.
NOTE: Don’t mix Standard and CCRS pumps. Both use four-digit pump
numbers.
Set Time and Sets the VECU time and date. Location There are two ways to set the VECU time and date:
Date →Set Time and Date 앫 Type in the desired time and date and click on the OK button.
Password 앫 Click on the OK button (without changing anything) to set the VECU time
Fleet Data (VECU) and date to the current PC time and date.
Print Current Allows the user to print the Location Once this option is selected, the View/Print Report selection screen will appear.
Parameters current parameter settings. →View/Print Current Parameters 1. Select the appropriate report (vehicle & data settings, PTO parameters,
Password etc.) by clicking on the circle next to the desired report.
None 2. Click on the Print button.
View Current Allows the user to view the Location Once this option is selected, the View/Print Report selection screen will appear.
Parameters current parameter settings. →View/Print Current Parameters 1. Select the appropriate report (vehicle and data settings, PTO parameters,
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Password etc.) by clicking on the circle next to the desired report.

None 2. Click on the View button.
Utilities Sets the PC configuration. Location 1. Select the Com Port setting (please refer to “Selecting Datalink Adapter”
→Utilities on page 41).
→Preferences 2. Select International Unit type.
Password 3. Select Language type.
None 4. Click on the Apply/OK button.
 VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Unit ID Programs the unit identification Range Location The unit ID number is set by the owner of the vehicle
Number number. Max.16 characters →Vehicle Component Parameters and is different from the Vehicle Identification
Default (General Options) Number (VIN); it is used mainly in a separate fleet
ID not entered Password management software package sold by Mack called
Vehicle Data (VECU) InfoMax™ Fleet Management Software. The Unit
IDs are used to track the vehicle in the InfoMax™
database.
Transmission Sets the highest gear ratio of Range Location This parameter is used by the Lower Gear Road
Top Gear the transmission (fastest truck 0.00 to 2.55 →Vehicle Component Parameters Speed Limit parameter to determine if the vehicle is
Ratio speed gear). Default (General Options) in top gear.
Factory Set based on Password If the transmission is changed from one type to
transmission installed Vehicle Data (VECU) another, the top gear ratio may be different. If the top
gear ratio changes, the Transmission Top Gear
Ratio setting must be changed.
Carrier Ratio Sets the gear ratio of the rear Range Location NOTE: If the rear axle carrier(s) is replaced, and the
axle carrier(s), which is used 2.0 to 18.0 →Vehicle Component Parameters new ratio is different from the ratio that is currently
by V-MAC to calculate Default (General Options) stored in V-MAC, the Carrier Ratio setting must be
accurate road speed Factory Set Password changed to match the new ratio.
information. Vehicle Data (VECU)
Tire Size Sets the tire size, which is Range Location Tire size affects accurate road speed calculation
used by V-MAC to calculate 300 to 600 revs/mile →Vehicle Component Parameters because different sized tires travel a different
accurate road speed Default (General Options) number of revolutions per mile.
information. Factory Set based on Password If tire sizes are changed, it will be necessary to
the tires installed Vehicle Data (VECU) change the Tire Size setting.
Tire revs/mile information can be obtained from the
tire manufacturer.
Road Speed Sets the number of teeth on Range Location This parameter is set at 16 pulses per mile because
Pickup Teeth the speedometer drive gear 4 to 100 pulses/rev. →Vehicle Component Parameters this is the only option currently available.
(tone wheel). Default (General Options) NOTE: For accurate speedometer readings, always
16 pulses/rev. Password make sure that the Road Speed Pickup Teeth
Vehicle Data (VECU) parameter is set to 16 pulses per mile.
Road Speed Sets the maximum vehicle Range Location V-MAC will not allow vehicle speed to exceed the
Limit speed limit. 40 to 100 mph →Vehicle Component Parameters value set for this parameter unless specific
(General Options) circumstances exist (see “Enable Cruise Button
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Default
N/A Password Bonus”).
Vehicle Data (VECU) NOTE: If the Enable Cruise Button Bonus feature is
enabled, it may be possible to exceed the Road
Speed Limit value using the speed control switches.

Page 71
 VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 72
Lower Gear Sets the fastest road speed Range Location This parameter is similar to the Road Speed Limit
Road Speed that can be attained in any 40 to 85 mph or the →Vehicle Component Parameters parameter; limiting road speed in all gears except
Limit gear below the highest gear of Road Speed Limit (General Options) the highest gear of the transmission.
the transmission. Default Password The purpose of this feature is to encourage the
65 mph Vehicle Data (VECU) driver to operate the vehicle in high gear where
maximum fuel economy can be attained.
NOTE: If an Eaton® Super 10 Top 2 transmission is
installed, this feature will not be available.
Engine Load Sets the engine load threshold Range Location If the Engine Threshold for No MPH Signal
Threshold for for the inactive road speed 20 to 100% →Vehicle Component Parameters parameter is set too low, this will increase the
No MPH sensor fault. Default (Threshold Options) likelihood of a road speed sensor fault becoming
Signal 40% Password active. Once a road speed fault is active, engine
Vehicle Data (VECU) speed control will drop out and the engine will return
to idle when the engine load threshold is reached.
This parameter setting can be helpful for customers
operating turbo-unloaders with various engine load
requirements. For maximum detection, select a
lower number.
Failed MPH Limits engine power if V-MAC Range Location This feature can function only when the Detect Loss
Sensor detects a road speed sensor 10 to 100% →Vehicle Component Parameters of Signal from MPH Sensor feature is enabled and
Engine Power failure. Default (Threshold Options) the Limit Power if No Signal from MPH Sensor or
Limit 50% Password Limit Power if Electrical Fault in MPH Sensor feature
Vehicle Data (VECU) is enabled.
Customers who desire no power limit should select
the maximum engine power limit (100%). However,
it is important to note that with the maximum engine
power limit selected, it is possible to defeat the set
Road Speed Limit (if there is an active road speed
sensor fault).
Battery Low Sets the low battery voltage Range Location If battery voltage drops below the Battery Low
Voltage Fault threshold. 10 to 12 volts →Vehicle Component Parameters Voltage Fault Threshold value (with key switch ON
Threshold Default (Threshold Options) and the engine not running), a fault indication will
10.5 volts Password alert the driver.
Vehicle Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Alternator Sets the low alternator voltage Range Location If alternator voltage drops below the Alternator Low
Low Voltage threshold. 10 to 12 volts →Vehicle Component Parameters Voltage Fault Threshold value (while the engine is
Fault Default (Threshold Options) running), a fault indication will alert the driver.
Threshold 11.5 volts Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
 VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Alternator Sets the high alternator Range Location If alternator voltage exceeds the Alternator High
High Voltage voltage threshold. 12 to 17 volts →Vehicle Component Parameters Voltage Fault Threshold value (while the engine is
Fault Default (Threshold Options) running), a fault indication will alert the driver.
Threshold 16 volts Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Engine Brake Determines the speed above Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Engagement the Cruise Control Set Speed 1 to 10 mph →Vehicle Component Parameters VECU s/w (see the table on page 34).
Delay in at which point the engine brake Default (Engine Brake)
Cruise is activated. 2 mph Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Engine Brake Determines the speed above Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Disengagement the cruise control set speed at 0.5 to 9 mph →Vehicle Component Parameters VECU s/w (see the table on page 34).
in Cruise which point the engine brake is Default (Engine Brake) This value must be lower than the Engine Brake
de-activated. 0.5 mph Password Engagement Delay in Cruise feature value.
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Enable Cruise Allows the user to set the Range Location With this feature enabled, the Road Speed Limit
Button Bonus Cruise Max Road Speed Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters threshold can only be exceeded by using the Accel
parameter to a value greater Default Password switch. Therefore, the driver must use the speed
than the Road Speed Limit. Disabled Vehicle Data (VECU) controls to get the “bonus” vehicle speed.
When this feature is disabled, NOTE: Once the Cruise Max Road Speed setting is
the option of setting Cruise changed, it will remain at the set value (even if the
Max Road Speed parameter Enable Cruise Button Bonus feature is then
higher than the Road Speed disabled). Therefore, if the Cruise Max Road Speed
Limit is not available. parameter was set at a greater value than the Road
Speed Limit parameter, and then the Enable Cruise
Button Bonus feature is disabled, the Cruise Max
Road Speed value will remain higher than the Road
Speed Limit value and the driver can exceed the
Road Speed Limit.
Detect Loss of Activates the fault code that Range Location An inactive road speed sensor condition exists when
Signal from indicates an inactive road Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters the circuit is electrically complete, but the sensor is
MPH Sensor speed sensor. Default (Sensor Options) not transmitting information to V-MAC with engine
Enabled Password underload. Tampering with or misadjusting the road
Vehicle Data (VECU) speed sensor may generate this condition.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

NOTE: The fault code will remain active after correct

adjustment is performed. Forward movement of the
vehicle is required for the fault to become inactive.

Page 73
 VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 74
Limit Power if Limits engine power to the Range Location If this option is disabled, engine power will not be
No Signal Failed MPH Sensor Engine Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters limited, although a fault (blink code 4-1, failure mode
from MPH Power Limit setting if no signal Default (Sensor Options) 8) will still be logged. Tampering or misaligning the
Sensor is detected from the road Enabled Password MPH sensor causes this condition. If this option is
speed sensor. Vehicle Data (VECU) enabled, a power limit must be set. The default is a
limit of 50% of engine power.
Limit Power if Limits engine power to the Range Location If this option is disabled, engine power will not be
Electrical Failed MPH Sensor Engine Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters limited, although an electrical fault will still be
Fault from Power Limit setting if a road Default (Sensor Options) logged.
MPH Sensor speed sensor electrical fault is Enabled Password
detected. Vehicle Data (VECU)
Customer Specifies the maximum engine Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Torque Limit torque level for all gear ratios 500 to 2,200 lb-ft →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
numerically higher (lower Default (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
gears) than the ratio set in 2,000 lb-ft Password To set torque limit, enter the Customer Torque Limit
Customer Torque Limit Gear Vehicle Data (VECU) Gear Ratio to activate the desired torque restriction.
Ratio.
NOTE: Appointing this torque level lower than the
normal engine peak torque output can restrict
engine performance for specified gear ratios.
Customer Sets transmission gear ratio Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Torque Limit above the engine torque (lower 1 to 65 →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Gear Ratio gear) limit specified by the Default (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
user. 1 Password NOTE: Entered ratio should be a ratio that is in the
Vehicle Data (VECU) transmission.
The torque limit values can limit but not override
factory settings.
Torque Limit Identifies the maximum time Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Ramp-Up needed for the engine to revert 1 to 10 sec →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Time to normal or full power. Default (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
1 sec Password Engine will ramp to full power when the vehicle
Vehicle Data (VECU) reaches a higher gear than specified for Customer
Torque Limit Gear Ratio.
Enable Enables torque limit with PTO Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Torque Limit ON to the customer defined Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
with PTO values if enabled. Default (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Disabled Password When disabled, no torque limit is used with PTO
Vehicle Data (VECU) engaged when vehicle is stationary.
 VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Enable if Fault Logs a fault (blink code 4-1, Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Incorrect failure mode 11 [failure mode Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Gear Ratio not identifiable]) and restricts Default (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
power or engine speed if Disabled Password This feature must be enabled to work. When
V-MAC detects vehicle is in an Vehicle Data (VECU) enabled, this feature will log a road speed sensor
incorrect gear ratio. fault (blink code 4-1, failure mode 11) if V-MAC
detects an invalid transmission-gear ratio and will
then limit engine power. (This fault will not become
inactive until the VECU sees a valid gear ratio
underload.) About 15% of full power is still available
to assist in downshifts when in limited power mode.
NOTE: This feature is recommended for highway
applications only.
Incentive Permits the user to set a road Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Increase in speed increase if the driver 0 to 20 mph or a →Vehicle Component Parameters VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Road Speed enters the incentive mode of calculated value based (Driver Incentive) This feature encourages the driver to operate the
Limit the Driver Incentive feature. on the Road Speed Limit Password vehicle within the incentive mode range
Default Vehicle Data (VECU) programmed by the user.
5 mph This feature works best when used with a V.I.P.™
display, which can notify the driver when the vehicle
road speed is either in incentive or penalty mode.
NOTE: For the Incentive Increase in Road Speed
Limit feature to function, it must first be turned on in
OEM data and enabled by selecting the Driver
Incentive function (located in Fleet Data — Display
and Trip Settings entry form). Please refer to the
“DRIVER INCENTIVE” function on page 111 for
further instruction.
Penalty Permits the user to set a road Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Decrease in speed decrease to be applied 0 to 20 mph or a →Vehicle Component Parameters VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Road Speed if the driver enters the penalty calculated value based (Driver Incentive) This feature discourages the driver from operating
Limit mode of the Driver Incentive on the Road Speed Limit Password the vehicle outside the incentive mode range
feature. Default Vehicle Data (VECU) programmed by the user.
5 mph This feature works best when used with a V.I.P.™
display, which can notify the driver when the vehicle
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

road speed is either in incentive or penalty mode.

NOTE: For the Penalty Decrease in Road Speed
Limit feature to function, it must first be turned on in
OEM data and enabled by selecting the Driver
Incentive function (located in Fleet Data — Display
and Trip Settings entry form). Please refer to the
“DRIVER INCENTIVE” function on page 111 for
further instruction.

Page 75
 VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 76
Speed Limit Permits the user to set the rate Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Adjustment of change when switching 0 to 20 mph/sec →Vehicle Component Parameters VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Rate between the incentive, base, Default (Driver Incentive) NOTE: For the Speed Limit Adjustment Rate
and penalty stages of the 0.5 mph/sec Password feature to function, it must first be turned on in OEM
Driver Incentive feature. Vehicle Data (VECU) data and enabled by selecting the Driver Incentive
function (located in Fleet Data — Display and Trip
Settings entry form). Please refer to the “DRIVER
INCENTIVE” function on page 111 for further
instruction.

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — GENERAL FEATURES

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Lower Gear Limits vehicle speed to the Range Location NOTE: Do NOT enable the Lower Gear Road Speed
Road Speed Lower Gear Road Speed Limit Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Limit Option if the vehicle has a MACK transmission
Limit Option setting when the transmission Default →General Features with eight speeds or less. This would allow the
is in lower gears. Disabled Password possibility of the gear steps dropping the engine out
Customer Data (VECU) of operating range.
This option is not available for vehicles with Eaton
Super 10 Top 2 transmissions.
Delay Engine Allows V-MAC to delay engine Range Location In situations such as descending a hill, it may be
Brake brake application while in Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU possible for the vehicle to overrun the Cruise Max
Application in Cruise mode. Default →General Features Road Speed setting. With the Delay Engine Brake
Cruise Enabled Password Application in Cruise option enabled, the engine
Customer Data (VECU) brake will turn on at 2 mph above the Cruise Max
Set Point setting and turn off at 0.5 mph above the
Cruise Max Road Speed setting.
Low Idle Enables the ability to change Range Location This feature cannot be enabled for vehicles with
Speed Adjust the engine low idle speed by Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Allison Automatic Transmissions.
with Switches using the speed control Default →General Features
switches on the dashboard. Enabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Hold Keeps the accessory relay Range Location The Hold Electrical Power ON Until Vehicle Stopped
Electrical energized (when the key is Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU feature is useful if a driver is suspected of turning
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Power ON turned off) until the vehicle Default →General Features the key off when going downhill to prevent
Until Vehicle comes to a stop. Disabled Password DataMax™ from logging an overspeed.
Stopped Customer Data (VECU) Beginning with Step 6 (VECU s/w 1MS320), this
option is not available for vehicles with Eaton®
Super 10 Top 2 transmissions.
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — GENERAL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Enable Sleep Displays an alert on the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Mode Alert V.I.P.™ which states that the Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Engine Sleep Mode feature Default →General Features FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and only for
has been enabled. Enabled Password vehicles equipped with a V.I.P.™
Customer Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
If Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the engine will not
start with no indication that a security measure is
enabled. To display an alert which states that
Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the user must
enable the Engine Sleep Mode Alert feature.
Enable Air Enables the air suspension Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Suspension speed interlock function. Yes/No →Customer Data/VECU VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Speed Default →General Features (Air IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34)
Interlock No Suspension) only.
Password For this feature to function, the air suspension input
Vehicle Data (VECU) must be installed.
Air Allows the VECU to see a Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Suspension 12-volt input from the air On/Off →Customer Data/VECU VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Polarity suspension switches. Default →General Features (Air IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34)
On Suspension) only.
Password When enabled, the VECU detects a 12-volt input
Vehicle Data (VECU) from the air suspension switches as the air
suspension is deflated, thereby limiting engine and
road speed.
For this feature to function, the air suspension input
must be installed.
NOTE: This feature must be disabled in order to use
the Driveshaft PTO 2 Option.
Air Determines if the driver will be Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Suspension notified via the electronic dash Yes/No →Customer Data/VECU VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Active when the air suspension is Default →General Features (Air IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34)
Dashboard active. No Suspension) only.
Alert Password For this feature to function, the air suspension input
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Vehicle Data (VECU) must be installed.

Road Speed Sets the fastest vehicle speed Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Limit When that can be achieved when the 5 to 25 mph →Customer Data/VECU VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Air air suspension is active. Default →General Features (Air IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34)
Suspension 15 mph Suspension) only.
Active Password For this feature to function, the air suspension input
Vehicle Data (VECU) must be installed.

Page 77
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — GENERAL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 78
Fuel Sets the type fuel economy Range Location Total MPG — All fuel consumed; shows the effects
Economy displayed on the dash for Total MPG/Driving MPG →Customer Data/VECU of idle operation on overall fuel economy.
Type vehicles equipped with a Default →General Features Driving MPG — Fuel consumed when moving;
Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ Total MPG Password shows only fuel mileage while driving.
Customer Data (VECU)
Cruise Switch Allows the driver to activate the Range Location This feature is available for Step 6 and higher VECU
Disables Top 2 feature (automatic shift Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Super 10 after 9th gear) using the Cruise Default →General Features FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and will only
Top 2 ON/OFF switch. Disabled Password appear if an Eaton® Super 10 Top 2 transmission is
Customer Data (VECU) installed (does not apply to Lightning™
Transmissions).
When enabled, the Top 2 feature can be regulated
with the cruise control on/off switch. If the switch is
ON, Top 2 Mode is activated and the transmission
will shift automatically when the transmission is
placed in 9th gear. If the switch is turned off, Top 2
Mode is inactive and the transmission will have to be
shifted manually.
NOTE: Cruise control does not have to be active for
this feature to function.
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location NOTE: Exceeding the overspeed setting will log a
Overspeed Engine Overspeed fault 1500 to 2500 rpm →Customer Data/VECU fault (PID 190, failure mode 0, speed high) in V-MAC
Fault condition. Default →General Features but will not turn on the electronic malfunction light on
Threshold 2350 rpm Password the dashboard.
Customer Data (VECU)
Service Brake Allows the user to set a higher Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Fault threshold for the service brake 5 to 10 mph/sec →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Threshold fault when the engine brake is Default →General Features FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
with Engine engaged. 5 mph/sec Password A service brake fault can sometimes be logged
Brake Customer Data (VECU) when the engine brake is engaged (for example, if
the vehicle is slowed faster than the threshold). For
those situations, the Service Brake Fault Threshold
with Engine Brake feature allows the user to set a
higher threshold for the service brake fault.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Coolant Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location When this option is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
Temperature use data from the coolant Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU warning system.
temperature sensor to Default →Shutdown Options (Sensor
determine if the engine should Enabled Options)
be shut down. If this option is Password
enabled, a warning will occur Customer Data (VECU)
at 223°F and shutdown will
occur at 227°F.
Oil Pressure Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location When this parameter is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
use data from the oil pressure Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU warning system.
sensor to determine if the Default →Shutdown Options (Sensor
engine should be shut down Enabled Options)
based on oil psi versus RPM. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Coolant Level Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location When this option is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
use data from the coolant level Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU warning system.
sensor to determine if the Default →Shutdown Options (Sensor
engine should be shut down. Enabled Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Automatic Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location This option will only appear if an automatic
Transmission use data from the automatic Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU transmission is detected.
Temperature transmission temperature Default →Shutdown Options (Sensor NOTE: When this parameter is disabled, V-MAC
Warning and sensor to determine if the Disabled Options) does not provide a warning for high transmission
Shutdown engine should be shut down. If Password temperature.
this option is enabled, a Customer Data (VECU)
warning will occur at 247°F For some older chassis with Allison HD automatic
and shutdown will occur at transmissions, the transmission oil temperature
255°F. sensor is connected to the coolant level sensor
(instead of a direct and individual connection).
Therefore, what appears to be a coolant level fault
may actually be a transmission oil temperature fault.
If equipped, there is also a transmission oil
temperature warning light which may help to
determine if the fault is related to coolant level or
transmission oil temperature.
NOTE: If the transmission oil temperature sensor is
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

connected to the coolant level sensor, the Coolant

Level option must be enabled to protect the
transmission.

Page 79
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 80
Transmission Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location This option will only appear if a transmission oil
Temperature use data from the transmission Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU temperature sensor is detected (CX only and
temperature sensor to Default →Shutdown Options (Sensor vehicles with electronic dash).
determine if the engine should Disabled Options) When this parameter is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
be shut down. If this option is Password warning system.
enabled, a warning will occur Customer Data (VECU)
at 310°F, and shutdown will
occur at 328°F.
Exhaust Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location This option will only appear if a pyrometer is
Temperature use data from the exhaust Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU detected (CX only and vehicles with electronic
temperature sensor to Default →Shutdown Options (Sensor dash).
determine if the engine should Disabled Options) When this option is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
be shut down. If this option is Password warning system.
enabled, a warning will occur Customer Data (VECU)
at 1100°F and shutdown will NOTE: An exhaust temperature shutdown may
occur at 1150°F. damage valves and seats, although it will usually
prevent the more serious damage that would result
from a temperature increase past the shutdown
threshold.
Idle Cooldown Allows a cooldown period (the Range Location This feature is available for Step 6 and higher VECU
Feature engine will idle for up to Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Enabled 3.5 minutes after the key is Default →Shutdown Options FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
turned off) if the V-MAC Disabled Password NOTE: To shut down immediately, cycle the key
system determines that the Customer Data (VECU) twice or press the Shutdown Override switch after
turbocharger is at or above turning the key off.
450°F.
If this feature is enabled, engine shutdown will be
NOTE: Parking brake must be postponed for up to 3.5 minutes if the turbocharger
on for this feature to work. is hot. If disabled, engine shutdown will occur when
the key is turned off.
NOTE: All switched accessories will turn off once
the engine has shut down.
NOTE: If a pyrometer is installed on a CX model
chassis, V-MAC will use the pyrometer reading to
determine the temperature of the turbocharger.
Shutdown will occur as soon as the temperature
drops below 450°F or the cooldown period has
elapsed (whichever comes first).
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Idle Shutdown Enables or disables Idle Range Location NOTE: For vehicles with Step 4 or Step 5 (1MS38P2
Shutdown. ON/OFF →Customer Data/VECU and 1MS317 EECU) software, be sure to disable the
Default →Shutdown Options Idle Shutdown parameter in Customer Data
OFF Password Programming prior to programming the modules.
Customer Data (VECU) Failure to do so may result in possible programming
failure and damage to the modules.
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location V-MAC requires electrical input from the PTO circuit
if PTO Active shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU for this function to operate.
if PTO is engaged. Default →Shutdown Options (Idle
Disabled Shutdown Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location V-MAC requires electrical input from the PTO circuit
if Single shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU for SSC to function or the hand throttle to be running
Speed if Single Speed Control (SSC) Default →Shutdown Options (Idle a SSC function.
Control Active is engaged. Disabled Shutdown Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether engine Range Location This feature is used to prevent idle shutdown in
if % Load power output will affect idle Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU turbo-unloader applications, where engine power
Used Higher shutdown. Default →Shutdown Options (Idle may be high during pumping operations but no PTO
Than If disabled, idle shutdown will Disabled Shutdown Options) input is used.
Threshold not occur above this threshold. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location If enabled, idle shutdown will operate even when the
if Hand shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Hand Throttle is applied.
Throttle if hand throttle speed control is Default →Shutdown Options (Idle If disabled, idle shutdown will not operate if the
Control Active engaged. Disabled Shutdown Options) Hand Throttle is applied.
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
if in Sleeper shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU) s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Mode if Sleeper Mode is enabled. Default →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
If enabled, idle shutdown Disabled Shutdown Options) NOTE: Sleeper Mode is enabled whenever the
features will function and Password driver presses the override switch, service brake or
Sleeper Mode will be Customer Data (VECU) accelerator pedal when the idle shutdown warning
cancelled. lamp/alarm is on.
If disabled, when the driver
enables Sleeper Mode, idle
shutdown will be cancelled
until the vehicle is moved.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

NOTE: Engine will not

shutdown if Sleeper Mode with
PTO 4 Fast Idle Active is
engaged without Sleeper
Mode also engaged.

Page 81
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 82
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
if in Sleeper shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Mode with if Sleeper Mode is enabled and Default →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
PTO 4 Fast the engine is operating at a Disabled Shutdown Options) NOTE: Engine will not shutdown if Sleeper Mode
Idle fast idle in response to PTO 4 Password with PTO 4 Fast Idle Active is engaged without
switch input. Customer Data (VECU) Sleeper Mode also engaged.
If enabled, idle shutdown NOTE: If this option is disabled and the following
features will function and conditions exist (vehicle is parked, PTO 4 is
Sleeper Mode will be engaged, speed control is active and the driver
cancelled. enables Sleeper Mode), idle shutdown will be
canceled until the vehicle is moved.
NOTE: Sleeper Mode is enabled whenever the
driver presses the override switch, service brake or
accelerator pedal when the idle shutdown warning
lamp/alarm is on.
Ambient Air Controls when Sleeper Mode Range Location Starting with Step 7 (VECU s/w 1MS328), an
Temperature is allowed based on the Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU additional customer programmable feature was
Option outside air temperature. Default →Shutdown Options (Idle added to enhance the Idle Shutdown function. When
NOTE: Not available on CV Disabled (Step 6)/ Shutdown Options) enabled, the customer must enter a minimum and
models beginning January Enabled (Step 7 and Password maximum temperature.
2004. above) Customer Data (VECU) If Sleeper Mode is enabled and ambient air
temperature is above the maximum (air conditioning
needed) or below the minimum (heat needed),
Sleeper Mode continues to operate and the engine
stays on.
If ambient air temperature falls between the set
temperature while Sleeper Mode is active, Sleeper
Mode cancels and the system reverts back to
normal Idle Shutdown mode. The engine will
shutdown after the Idle Shutdown Time has ended.
When disabled, Idle Shutdown uses standard
parameters to determine Idle Shutdown.
NOTE: To use this feature, an ambient air
temperature sensor must be installed and enabled
and Idle Shutdown with Sleeper Mode disabled.
NOTE: During the warning period, the electronic
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

malfunction lamp will flash quietly instead of the

normal shutdown lamp and alarm turning on and
waking the driver.
(Selection of ambient air temperature sensor is
located in OEM Data on the main frame via the F3
Update Option screen of V-MAC.)
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Minimum Sets the minimum outside air Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Ambient Air temperature below which −5 to 80°F →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Temperature Sleeper Mode continues to Default →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
operate. 60°F Shutdown Options) For more information on this feature, see Ambient
Password Air Temperature Option.
Customer Data (VECU)
Maximum Sets the maximum outside air Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Ambient Air temperature above which 0 to 125°F →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Temperature Sleeper Mode continues to Default →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
operate. 80°F Shutdown Options) For more information on this feature, see Ambient
Password Air Temperature Option.
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls the length of time that Range Location Example: If the Idle Shutdown Timer feature is set at
Timer the engine can idle before 1 to 999 minutes →Customer Data/VECU 5 minutes and the Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer
shutdown occurs. Default →Shutdown Options (Idle parameter is set at 10 minutes, the vehicle will run
If the engine begins idling with 10 minutes Shutdown Options) for 15 minutes (after the Idle Shutdown Warm-Up
the coolant temperature lower Password Temperature is reached) before shutdown.
than the Idle Shutdown Warm- Customer Data (VECU) However, if the engine begins idling with the coolant
Up Temperature threshold, the temperature at or above the warm-up temperature,
time limit set by the Idle only the time limit set by the Idle Shutdown Timer
Shutdown Timer feature will be feature will apply.
added to the time limit set by NOTE: Once an engine shutdown occurs with the
the Idle Shutdown Warm-Up engine at or above the warm-up temperature, the
Timer feature. Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer setting will be
ignored when the engine is restarted. In the
example above, the vehicle will only run for
5 minutes (the Idle Shutdown Timer setting) before
shutting down again.
Idle Shutdown Controls the amount of warm- Range Location See Idle Shutdown Timer limitations.
Warm-Up up time allowed after the 0 to 199 minutes →Customer Data/VECU
Timer engine has reached the Idle Default →Shutdown Options (Idle
Shutdown Warm-Up 5 minutes Shutdown Options)
Temperature threshold. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls the temperature at Range Location
Warm-Up which the Idle Shutdown 0° to 255°F →Customer Data/VECU
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Temperature Warm-Up Timer begins its Default →Shutdown Options (Idle

count. 80°F Shutdown Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)

Page 83
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 84
Idle Shutdown Sets the length of time Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Warning Time between the idle shutdown 5 seconds to Idle →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
warning and actual shutdown. Shutdown time. →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Default Shutdown Options) NOTE: This time period has generally been
30 seconds Password 30 seconds.
Customer Data (VECU) When Sleeper Mode is enabled, the Idle Shutdown
Warning Time should be set higher because more
time may be necessary.
Idle Shutdown Sets the threshold for the If Range Location This parameter refers to the percent of engine
% Load Power Used Higher Than 0 to 100% →Customer Data/VECU power.
Threshold Threshold option. Default →Shutdown Options (Idle NOTE: Monitor in Service Diagnostics.
20% Shutdown Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — VOCATIONAL FEATURES

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Set/Resume Defines how the speed control Range Location The Set/Resume Switch State feature is primarily for
Switch State Set and Resume switches can Set/Decel–Res/Accel or →Customer Data/VECU vocational applications for which body builders have
function. →Vocational Features special interface requirements for the speed control
Set/Accel–Res/Decel system.
Password
Default Customer Data (VECU)
Set/Decel–Res/Accel
Inhibit Cruise Programs V-MAC to disengage Range Location If this option is disabled, cruise control will continue
Control with cruise control (and not allow Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU to run with a PTO engaged.
PTO ON cruise control to be re- Default →Vocational Features (General Regardless of whether this option is enabled or
engaged) when a PTO is Disabled Options) disabled, engine speed is limited to the PTO Engine
turned on. Password Speed Limit threshold for that PTO.
Customer Data (VECU)
Single Press Allows the driver to resume Range Location
of Resume to cruise control (after it has Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU
Accelerate dropped out) by pressing and Default →Vocational Features (General
holding the Resume switch; Disabled Options)
vehicle speed will resume (and Password
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

continue to increase) until the Customer Data (VECU)

switch is released.
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — VOCATIONAL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Initial Set Allows the driver to use the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
using Resume switch to set speed Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Resume control. Default →Vocational Features (General FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Switch Disabled Options) NOTE: This feature is only available if speed control
Password has not already been set. Once speed control has
Customer Data (VECU) been set, the Resume switch will act as the Accel
switch.
Driveshaft Programs V-MAC to treat Range Location NOTE: PTO 2 and the parking brake must be
PTO 2 Option PTO 2 as a Driveshaft PTO. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU engaged for operation as a Driveshaft PTO.
Default →Vocational Features NOTE: In order to use this option, the Enable Air
Disabled Password Suspension Speed Interlock feature must be
Customer Data (VECU) disabled.
Set/Resume Programs V-MAC to log a fault Range Location The speed control switch must be in the ON position
Fault if the Set (blink code 7-3) or Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU for this feature to function.
Diagnostic Resume (blink code 7-4) Default →Vocational Features NOTE: It may be necessary to disable this feature
switch is shorted to 12 volts Enabled Password for certain custom speed control applications.
(with the speed control switch Customer Data (VECU)
on) or held for 60 seconds.
Switch Reassigns certain switches Range Location Switch reassignments are required only if the
Assignments from their original use to other Two auxiliary switches, →Customer Data/VECU function of a switch is changed for use as an
inputs for speed control. fan clutch override →Vocational Features engagement, dropout, temporary dropout or PTO in
switch and engine brake Password the speed control system.
low switch can be Customer Data (VECU) Only one physical switch (engine brake low, spare,
reassigned as PTO 3, aux. 1 and fan clutch override) can be used for each
PTO 4, Control 1 or reassigned (logical) switch, and the physical switch
Control 2 can be used only once.
Default For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w (see the “STEP/
No switches reassigned. SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III”
table on page 34) only, if the Brake Pad sensor is
installed, the Spare and Aux. 1 switches are not
available.
NOTE: Some factory installed features may make
use of the two auxiliary switches and are not
available for reassignment in this case.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 85
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CAB FAN CONTROLS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 86
Allow Fan Allows the driver to engage the Range Location Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
Override fan while the vehicle is moving Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
When Moving for the amount of override time Default →Cab Fan Controls (General overrides can also be completely disabled.
set by the Fan Override Time Disabled Options) Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
When Moving parameter. Password fans and fan override switches.
Customer Data (VECU)
Fan Override Programs the override time, for Range Location Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
Time When the Allow Fan Override When 0 to 1500 seconds →Customer Data/VECU engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
Moving Moving feature. Default →Cab Fan Control Options overrides can also be completely disabled.
60 seconds (General Options) Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
Password fans and fan override switches.
Customer Data (VECU)
Allow Fan Allows the driver to engage the Range Location Fan overrides can be set to engage the fan clutch
Override fan to prevent fan cycling from Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU when parked or moving. Fan overrides can also be
When Parked occurring while the vehicle is Default →Cab Fan Control Options completely disabled.
parked (i.e., the driver is Disabled (General Options) NOTE: The Allow Fan Override When Parked
sleeping). Password feature will automatically disengage above
Customer Data (VECU) 2100 rpm.
NOTE: The driver cannot overspeed the fan using
the override switch. If the operator engages the
override switch and engine speed exceeds any
programmed threshold, the override will be
cancelled.
Requires an optional dash-mounted override switch.
Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
fans and fan override switches.
Engage Fan Engages the fan when the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
with Engine engine brake is engaged Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w systems (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Brake (provided the engine brake Default →Cab Fan Control Options IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34)
switch is in the HIGH or Disabled Password only.
number 2 position). Customer Data (VECU) With this feature enabled, the fan will engage
approximately 5 seconds after the engine brake
engages and will disengage 10 seconds after the
engine brake disengages.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

NOTE: If rated engine speed is exceeded, the fan

will disengage.
NOTE: This feature increases usable braking power,
not maximum braking power.
Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
fans and fan override switches.
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CAB FAN CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engage Fan Engages the fan when the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
with PTO ON specified PTO is engaged. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Default →Cab Fan Control Options FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Disabled Password NOTE: The fan will disengage if engine speed
Customer Data (VECU) exceeds any of the programmed thresholds.
NOTE: If rated engine speed is exceeded, the fan
will disengage.
Only applicable for vehicles equipped with ON/OFF
fans and fan override switches.

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Cruise Allows the user to choose the Range Location If Standard Cruise Control mode is selected, only
Control Mode cruise control mode. Standard, Custom or →Customer Data/VECU standard cruise settings will apply. Any custom
Disabled →Cruise Control cruise settings will be erased. To avoid losing any
Default Password custom cruise settings, save before exiting screen.
Standard Customer Data (VECU) If Disabled Cruise Control mode is selected, all
parameters will be disabled and any custom cruise
settings will be erased.
Disable Disables cruise control. Range Location Whenever Disable Cruise Control is selected from
Cruise Standard, Custom or →Customer Data/VECU the Cruise Control Mode drop-down list, cruise will
Control Disabled →Cruise Control (Cruise Control not operate. This option is intended for vocational
Default Mode) and in-city applications. Applies to all software
Standard Password levels.
Customer Data (VECU)
Autoresume Programs cruise control to Range Location If this option is disabled, cruise control will drop out
with Clutch automatically resume after a Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU after a shift and it will be necessary to press the
shift (once the clutch has been Default →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise Resume switch after releasing the clutch pedal to
re-engaged). Disabled Control) re-engage cruise control.
Password The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Customer Data (VECU) Custom and be enabled for this feature to function.
Accel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Speed set speed increase to coincide 0–2 mph/bump →Customer Data/VECU Custom and enabled for this feature to function.
with one quick “bump” of the Default →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise
Accel switch. 1 mph/bump Control)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)

Page 87
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES (CONTINUED)

Page 88
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Decel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Speed set speed decrease to coincide 0–2 mph/bump →Customer Data/VECU Custom and enabled for this feature to function.
with one quick “bump” of the Default →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise
Decel switch. 1 mph/bump Control)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Hold to Ensures that before any Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Nearest change in road speed can 0, 0.25, 0.5 or 1.0 mph →Customer Data/VECU Custom and enabled for this feature to function.
occur (using the Set, Accel or Default →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise Example: Assume that the current road speed is
Decel switch), V-MAC will find 0.5 mph Control) 63.4 mph, the Accel Bump Speed parameter is set
the nearest increment of the Password to 2 mph and the Hold to Nearest parameter is set to
Hold to Nearest setting and Customer Data (VECU) 1.0 mph. If the driver bumps the Accel switch,
apply the change in road V-MAC will determine that 63 mph is the nearest
speed to that value. If disabled, increment of 1.0 to 63.4 mph and add the 2 mph
any change in road speed bump to 63 mph. The resulting speed (after one
(using the Set, Accel or Decel bump) will be 65.0 mph.
switch) will apply to the current
speed. In the above example, if the Hold to Nearest
parameter is set to 0 (meaning it is disabled), the
resulting speed (after one bump) will be 65.4 mph.
Cruise Min Controls the minimum vehicle Range Location If vehicle speed drops below this speed, cruise
Road Speed speed to engage and remain in 15 to 35 mph →Customer Data/VECU control will drop out and cannot be set.
cruise. Default →Cruise Control (Standard
20 mph Cruise Settings)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Cruise Max Controls the maximum vehicle Range Location The Cruise Max Road Speed limit should be set 2 to
Road Speed speed that can be obtained in 40 mph to the Road →Customer Data/VECU 3 mph below the Road Speed Limit threshold to
cruise control. Speed Limit value (or 40 →Cruise Control (Standard allow the driver some extra speed for passing when
to 100 mph if the Cruise Cruise Settings) needed.
Button Bonus option is Password This value may be higher than the Road Speed Limit
enabled) Customer Data (VECU) if cruise button bonus is enabled.
Default
75 mph
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Bump Speed Allows the user to program a Range Location This standard cruise option is only available if the
set speed increase or 0, 0.5, 1, 2 mph/bump →Customer Data/VECU Cruise Control mode is set to STANDARD.
decrease to coincide with one Default →Cruise Control (Standard
quick “bump” of the Accel or 1 mph/bump Cruise Settings)
Decel switch. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Incentive Allows the user to program a Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Increase in maximum cruise speed 0 to 20 mph or a →Customer Data/VECU VECU software (1MS369 and higher).
Cruise Max increase be granted if the calculated value based →Cruise Control (Standard NOTE: For the Incentive Increase in Cruise Max
Speed driver enters the “incentive on the Road Speed Limit Cruise Settings) Speed feature to function, it must first be turned on
mode” of the Driver Incentive Default in OEM data and enabled by selecting the Driver
function. 5 mph Incentive function (located in Fleet Data — Display
and Trip Settings entry form). Please refer to the
“DRIVER INCENTIVE” function on page 111 for
further instruction.
NOTE: This feature is available for both Standard
and Custom Cruise Control modes.
Penalty Allows the user to program a Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Decrease in maximum cruise speed 0 to 20 mph or a →Customer Data/VECU VECU software (1MS369 and higher).
Cruise Max decrease be applied if the calculated value based →Cruise Control (Standard NOTE: For the Penalty Decrease in Cruise Max
Speed driver enters the “penalty on the Road Speed Limit Cruise Settings) Speed feature to function, it must first be turned on
mode” of the Driver Incentive Default in OEM data and enabled by selecting the Driver
function. 5 mph Incentive function (located in Fleet Data — Display
and Trip Settings entry form). Please refer to the
“DRIVER INCENTIVE” function on page 111 for
further instruction.
NOTE: This feature is available for both Standard
and Custom Cruise Control modes.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 89
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES (CONTINUED)

Page 90
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engagement Designates one or more Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected
and Dropout switches as a requirement for Required ON, Required →Customer Data/VECU and enabled for these features to function.
Requirements cruise control operation. The OFF, Ignore →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise NOTE: If PTO 1, PTO 2, PTO 3 or PTO 4 is selected
state of each switch (ON or Default Control) as an engagement requirement, the Inhibit Cruise
OFF) can be programmed as Ignore Password with PTO ON option must be disabled.
an engagement, dropout or Customer Data (VECU)
temporary dropout NOTE: If a switch is programmed as an engagement
requirement for cruise control. requirement when it is in the ON position, turning
the switch off once cruise is engaged will not disable
cruise unless that switch was programmed as a
dropout requirement when it is in the OFF position.

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Enable Allows the user to program Range Location NOTE: PTO switches cannot be used for hand
Custom EHT custom Electronic Hand Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU throttle initialization. PTO switches cause hand
Control Throttle (EHT) control options. Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control throttle dropout.
Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Autoset Programs V-MAC to Range Location The hand throttle Autoset feature is similar to the
automatically jump to the hand Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Jump to Min Speed feature; it can be used as a fast
throttle Min Set Speed (without Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control idle setting, or for numerous remote control
pressing the Set switch) when Disabled (Custom Options) applications.
hand throttle speed control is Password
enabled. Customer Data (VECU)
Jump to Min Programs V-MAC to jump to Range Location If this feature is disabled, the hand throttle speed
Speed the hand throttle Min Set Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU cannot be set unless the engine speed is above the
Speed setting when the Set Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Min Set Speed setting.
switch is pressed. Disabled (Custom Options) NOTE: If the Min Set Speed parameter is set lower
Password than the Low Idle Speed setting (programmed in
Customer Data (VECU) SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS), speed control will be set
but the engine speed will not drop below the Low
Idle Speed setting.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Single Speed Enables the hand throttle Range Location EHT single speed control can be overridden with the
Control (SSC) single speed control mode; Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU accelerator pedal (up to the EHT Engine Speed
engine speed will Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Limit setting).
automatically go to the Disabled (Custom Options)
Electronic Hand Throttle SSC Password
RPM setting if Autoset is Customer Data (VECU)
enabled.
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Hold to Ensures that the minimum Range Location This option is automatically enabled if hand throttle
Minimum engine speed (set in the hand Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Autoset, Jump to Min Speed or Single Speed
Speed throttle Min Set Speed feature) Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Control feature is enabled.
is maintained whenever hand Disabled (Custom Options) If engine speed is dragged below the hand throttle
throttle speed control is active. Password Min Set Speed value, more fuel will be injected to
Customer Data (VECU) get back up to the minimum speed setting.
Dropout Disengages hand throttle Range Location This feature cannot be enabled if the hand throttle
Above speed control if engine speed Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Autoset feature is enabled.
Maximum exceeds the hand throttle Max Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
Speed Set Speed setting. Disabled (Custom Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Electronic Sets the engine speed for EHT Range Location The Electronic Hand Throttle SSC RPM setting
Hand Throttle operation in Single Speed 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU should be greater than the hand throttle Min Set
SSC RPM Control mode. Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Speed and less than both the hand throttle Max Set
625 rpm (Custom Options) Speed and Engine Speed Limit settings.
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Accel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed increase to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
of the Accel switch. 0 rpm/bump (Custom Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Decel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed decrease to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
of the Decel switch. 0 rpm/bump (Custom Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Hold to Ensures that before any Range Location Example: Assume that the current engine speed is
Nearest change in engine speed can 0 or nearest 5 to nearest →Customer Data/VECU 1364 rpm, the Accel Bump Speed parameter is set
occur (using the Accel or 2000 rpm →Elect. Hand Throttle Control to 50 rpm and the Hold to Nearest parameter is set
Decel switch), V-MAC will find (Custom Options) to Nearest 25 rpm. If the driver bumps the Accel
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Default
the nearest increment of the 0 Password switch, V-MAC will determine that 1375 is the
Hold to Nearest setting and Customer Data (VECU) nearest increment of 25 to 1364 rpm and add the
apply the change in engine 50 rpm bump to 1375 rpm. The resulting speed
speed to that value. (after one bump) will be 1425 rpm.
In the above example, if the Hold to Nearest
parameter is set to Nearest 10, the resulting speed
(after one bump) will be 1410 rpm because the
nearest value to 1364 would be 1360.

Page 91
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 92
Accel Ramp Sets the rate at which engine Range Location Not applicable unless custom EHT settings are
Rate speed increases when the 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU enabled.
Accel switch is pressed. Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
100 rpm/sec (Custom Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Decel Ramp Sets the rate at which engine Range Location Not applicable unless custom EHT settings are
Rate speed decreases when the 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU enabled.
Decel switch is pressed. Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
100 rpm/sec (Custom Options)
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Min Set Controls the minimum engine Range Location NOTE: If the Low Idle Speed Adjust with Switches
Speed speed allowed for Electronic 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU feature is enabled, the hand throttle Min Set Speed
Hand Throttle (EHT) operation; Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control value must be set to 475 rpm (because the Low Idle
hand throttle speed control will 475 rpm (General Options) Speed Adjustment with Switches feature drops the
not operate below this engine Password engine speed to 500 rpm before using the speed
speed. Customer Data (VECU) control switches to set the new low idle speed). If the
Engine speed must be at or hand throttle Min Set Speed value is greater than
above this setting before EHT 500 rpm, it may not be possible to set low idle with
will operate. the speed control switches.
NOTE: For normal operation, if the engine speed
drops below this value, speed control will drop out.
Max Set Sets the maximum engine Range Location NOTE: Engine speed cannot exceed this limit using
Speed speed that can be achieved 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU the Accel switch; however, engine speed can be
using the speed control Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control increased up to the hand throttle Engine Speed
switches. 2100 rpm (General Options) Limit threshold using the accelerator pedal.
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Engine Speed Controls the maximum engine Range Location This speed cannot be exceeded with the accelerator
Limit speed allowed with the 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU pedal or the switches.
Electronic Hand Throttle (EHT) Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
engaged. 2100 rpm (General Options)
Password
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Customer Data (VECU)

Max Road Sets the maximum vehicle Range Location NOTE: Hand throttle speed control will not operate
Speed speed threshold for hand 0 to 20 mph or cruise →Customer Data/VECU above this vehicle speed; however, cruise control
throttle speed control. Min Road Speed →Elect. Hand Throttle Control will operate if vehicle speed is at or above the cruise
Default (General Options) control Min Road Speed setting.
10 mph Password
Customer Data (VECU)
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Ramp Rate Programs the rate at which the Range Location Not applicable if Custom EHT settings are enabled.
engine speed increases and 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU This rate is also used when the hand throttle Single
decreases when the Accel and Default →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Speed Control (SSC) feature is engaged or
Decel switches are used. 100 rpm/sec (General Options) resumed.
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Engagement Designates one or more of the Range Location NOTE: Control 1 and Control 2 must be defined in
and Dropout assigned switches Required ON, Required →Customer Data/VECU the Switch Assignments field in order to be used as
Requirements (programmed in Switch OFF, Ignore, Pedal →Elect. Hand Throttle Control requirements.
Assignments) as requirements Pushed, Pedal NOT (General Options) NOTE: At least one dropout condition must be
for electronic hand throttle Pushed Password specified.
speed control operation. The Default Customer Data (VECU)
state of each switch (ON or NOTE: If a switch is programmed as an engagement
Ignore requirement when it is in the ON position, turning
OFF) can be programmed as
an engagement, dropout or the switch off once EHT control is engaged will not
temporary dropout disable EHT control unless that switch was
requirement for hand throttle programmed as a dropout requirement when it is in
control. the OFF position.

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Single Speed Programs V-MAC to apply the Range Location
Control (SSC) PTO Preset Speed setting Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU
when PTO speed control is Default →PTO Speed Control Settings
enabled. Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Park Brake Specifies whether the parking Range Location If this parameter is enabled, the parking brake must
Check to brake must be applied for Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU be applied for the Preset Speed setting to be used.
Enable PTO single speed control settings to Default →PTO Speed Control Settings If disabled, the Preset Speed setting will be in effect
be in effect when the PTO is Disabled Password without the parking brake being applied.
engaged. Customer Data (VECU) Essentially, this parameter is a short-cut for setting
the parking brake as an engagement requirement
for PTO operation.
NOTE: Park Brake engagement requirements for
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

PTO 2 cannot be changed if Driveshaft PTO is

selected.

Page 93
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 94
Min Set Sets the minimum engine Range Location For normal operations, if engine speed drops below
Speed speed allowed for PTO 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU this value, speed control will drop out.
operation; PTOs will not Default →PTO Speed Control Settings
operate below this engine 475 rpm Password
speed. Customer Data (VECU)
Engine speed must be at or
above this setting before
speed control for the PTO will
operate.
Max Set Sets the maximum engine Range Location Although this limit cannot be exceeded using the
Speed speed that can be achieved 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU Accel switch, engine speed can be increased up to
using the speed control Default →PTO Speed Control Settings the Engine Speed Limit threshold using the
switches. 2100 rpm Password accelerator pedal.
Customer Data (VECU) This parameter must not be set at a value less than
the mode’s Minimum Set Speed setting.
Max Road Sets the vehicle speed Range Location
Speed threshold for PTO dropout; 0 to 20 mph or Cruise →Customer Data/VECU
Dropout Speed Control will not operate Min mph unless →PTO Speed Control Settings
above this vehicle speed. Driveshaft PTO is Password
enabled. Customer Data (VECU)
Default
10 mph
Engine Speed Sets the maximum engine Range Location NOTE: Because this is the absolute engine speed
Limit speed allowed with PTO speed 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU limit when a PTO is engaged, use caution when
control engaged; this speed Default →PTO Speed Control Settings setting a value greater than the PTO Max Set Speed
cannot be exceeded with the 1800 rpm Password parameter.
accelerator pedal or the Customer Data (VECU)
switches.
Preset Speed Sets the engine speed to be Range Location For this function to operate, the PTO Single Speed
used when PTO single speed 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU Control (SSC) option must be enabled.
control is engaged. Default →PTO Speed Control Settings
1000 rpm Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Ramp Rate Programs the rate at which Range Location This rate is also used when PTO single speed
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

engine speed increases and 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU control is engaged and resumed.
decreases when the Accel and Default →PTO Speed Control Settings
Decel switches are used. 100 rpm/sec Password
Customer Data (VECU)
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Road Speed Sets the maximum fueled Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Limit vehicle speed allowed when 0 to 100 mph →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
PTO (1, 2, 3 or 4) is engaged. Default →PTO Speed Control Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
100 mph Password For each PTO, a road speed limit can be applied. If
Customer Data (VECU) V-MAC receives a PTO engaged signal, the vehicle
road speed limit will be limited to this value.
NOTE: This parameter doesn’t override the normal
vehicle Road Speed Limit setting.
NOTE: Speed Control will still drop-out at the PTO
Maximum Road Speed Setting.
The PTO road speed limit will be restricted under
accelerator pedal, speed control, and Cruise control
operations. However, if the engine is forced to ride
on the low idle governor, the low idle governor will
take priority. This way, the vehicle is restricted to the
PTO road speed limit (provided that the
transmission is in a reasonable gear for road
speed).

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Autoset Programs V-MAC to jump Range Location The PTO Autoset feature is similar to the Jump to
automatically to the PTO Min Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Min Speed feature; it can be used as a fast idle
Set Speed (without pressing Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) setting, or for numerous remote control applications.
the Set switch) when PTO Disabled Password
speed control is enabled with Customer Data (VECU)
variable speed control. When
enabled with Single Speed
Control, V-MAC automatically
goes to the Preset Speed.
Jump to Programs V-MAC to jump to Range Location If this feature is disabled, PTO speed control cannot
Minimum the PTO Min Set Speed when Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU be set unless engine speed is above the PTO Min
Speed the Set switch is pressed. Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) Set Speed.
Disabled Password NOTE: If the PTO Min Set Speed parameter is set
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Customer Data (VECU) lower than the Low Idle Speed parameter, PTO
speed control will be set but engine speed will not
drop below the Low Idle Speed setting (programmed
in SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS).

Page 95
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 96
Hold to Programs V-MAC to not allow Range Location If engine speed is dragged below this setting, more
Minimum engine speed to drop below Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU fuel will be injected to get engine speed back up to
Speed the PTO Min Set Speed. Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) the PTO minimum set.
Disabled Password This option is automatically enabled if PTO Autoset,
Customer Data (VECU) or Single Speed Control (SSC) features are
enabled.
Dropout Programs V-MAC to disengage Range Location This feature cannot be enabled if the PTO Autoset
Above PTO speed control if engine Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU feature is enabled.
Maximum speed exceeds the PTO Max Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
Speed Set Speed. Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Accel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed increase to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
of the Accel switch. 0 rpm/bump Password
The Bump Speed must be an Customer Data (VECU)
even multiple of the Hold to
Nearest setting (unless none is
specified).
Enable Enables Custom PTO when Range Location
Custom PTO selected. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU
Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Decel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed decrease to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
of the Decel switch. 0 rpm/bump Password
The Bump Speed must be an Customer Data (VECU)
even multiple of the Hold to
Nearest setting (unless none is
specified).
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Hold to Ensures that before any Range Location Example: Assume that the current engine speed is
Nearest change in engine speed can 5 to 2000 rpm →Customer Data/VECU 1336 rpm, the Accel Bump Speed parameter is set
occur (using the Accel or Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) to 100 rpm and the Hold to Nearest parameter is set
Decel switch), V-MAC will find 0 rpm Password to Nearest 50 rpm. If the driver bumps the Accel
the nearest increment of the Customer Data (VECU) switch, V-MAC will determine that 1350 is the
PTO Hold to Nearest setting nearest increment of 50 to 1336 rpm and add the
and apply the change in 100-rpm bump to 1350 rpm. The resulting speed
engine speed to that value. (after one bump) will be 1450 rpm.
In the above example, if the Hold to Nearest
parameter is set to Nearest 25, the resulting speed
(after one bump) will be 1425 rpm because the
nearest value to 1336 would be 1325 rpm.
Accel Ramp Programs the rate at which Range Location
Rate engine speed increases when 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU
the Accel switch is pressed. Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
While in Single Speed Control, 100 rpm/sec Password
engine speed ramps up to the Customer Data (VECU)
Preset Speed at this rate.
Decel Ramp Programs the rate at which Range Location
Rate engine speed decreases when 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU
the Decel switch is pressed. Default →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
100 rpm/sec Password
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 97
 CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 98
Engagement Designates one or more Range Location NOTE: PTO 3, PTO 4, Control 1 and Control 2 must
and Dropout switches as requirements for Required ON, Required →Customer Data/VECU be defined in the Switch Assignments field in order
Requirements PTO operation. The state of OFF, Ignore, Pedal →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) to be used as engagement or dropout requirements.
each switch (ON or OFF) can Pushed or Pedal NOT Password NOTE: At least one dropout condition must be
be programmed as an Pushed Customer Data (VECU) specified.
engagement, dropout or Default
temporary dropout NOTE: If a switch is programmed as an engagement
Ignore requirement when it is in the ON position, turning
requirement for PTO speed
control. the switch off will not disable speed control unless
the switch was also programmed as a dropout
requirement when it is in the OFF position.
MINIMUM RULE: The Minimum Rule states that the
system will choose the minimum value from the
PTOs that are engaged
1. The lowest active Min Set Speed is the
minimum*.
2. The lowest active Max Set Speed is the
maximum*.
3. The lowest active Max Vehicle Speed is used
for drop out.
4. The lowest active Engine Speed Limit is used
(true even when speed control is not active).
5. The lowest active Preset Single Speed is
used.
6. The lowest active Ramp Rate is used.
7. Single speed takes precedence over variable
speed.
8. For Step 4 (VECU s/w 1MS312/312A)
software, non-Autoset takes precedence over
Autoset.
9. For Step 7 and higher VECU s/w (see the
“STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR
V-MAC III” table on page 34), the lowest active
Road Speed Limit is used. *
* This becomes true once the Set/Decel or Resume/
Accel inputs are toggled or held to 12 volts. To
lower a speed without using these inputs, set an
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Engine Speed Limit.

 CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
High Idle Sets the maximum no load Range Location The High Idle Engine Speed parameter basically
Engine Speed engine speed. 1850 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/EECU controls how quickly the power cuts off when revving
(Droop) 2050 to 2100 rpm* Password the engine, typically during an upshift.
2120 to 2170 rpm** Customer Data (EECU) *For ASET™ AI and AC engines.
Default **For all ASET™ AMI engines.
2100/2170** rpm
Coolant Sets the coolant temperature Range Location Setting a lower temperature will cause the fan to
Temperature threshold for engaging the ON/ 190°F to 210°F →Customer Data/EECU engage earlier. Likewise, setting a higher
Fan OFF fan only (not available for Default Password temperature will cause the fan to engage later.
Engagement electronic viscous fan). 200°F Customer Data (EECU)
Threshold
Air Temp. Fan Sets the air temperature Range Location An ON/OFF fan type is required for this feature to
Engagement threshold for engaging the ON/ 130°F to 175°F →Customer Data/EECU operate.
Threshold OFF fan only (not available for Default Password Setting a lower temperature will cause the fan to
electronic viscous fan). 175°F Customer Data (EECU) engage earlier. Likewise, setting a higher
temperature will cause the fan to engage later.
Air Sets the amount of time that Range Location Requires an ON/OFF-type engine fan.
Conditioning the ON/OFF fan remains ON 1 to 300 seconds →Customer Data/EECU If this parameter is programmed to 0, the air
Override Time when the Air Conditioning (5 minutes) Password conditioning fan will engage and disengage with A/C
(A/C) system stops requesting Default Customer Data (EECU) pressure while the vehicle is parked.
fan operation with the vehicle 60 seconds
parked, and the A/C system no When parameter is set and the vehicle is moving,
longer requires fan operation the engine fan will operate normally. The engine fan
(not available for electronic will engage as needed by the A/C system and
viscous fan). disengage when no longer needed by the climate
control system.
Engine Sleep Enables Engine Sleep Mode Range Location As with theft deterrence, Engine Sleep Mode is
Mode so that the engine will not start, Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU intended to slow a thief down to the point at which it
even if a valid theft deterrence Default Password is undesirable to steal the vehicle.
access code is entered. This Disabled Customer Data (EECU) This feature is aimed at customers who have limited
feature must be disabled to yard security or who have vehicles parked on lots for
start the vehicle. extended periods of time.
If Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the engine will not
start with no indication that a security measure is
enabled. To display an alert which states that
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the vehicle must

have a Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) and the
user must enable the Engine Sleep Mode Alert
feature.
NOTE: Because the engine will not start when the
Engine Sleep Mode feature is activated, it cannot be
enabled at the factory or at the distributor. The
customer only, can enable it as needed.

Page 99
 CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 100
Smart Fan Activates diagnostics for the Range Location If this feature is disabled, the fan drive will not be
Type Installed ON/OFF fan or electronic None/On-Off/Electronic →Customer Data/EECU controlled by V-MAC and cannot be overridden
viscous fan. Viscous Password using the override switch on the dash.
Default Customer Data (EECU) NOTE: Do NOT enable the Smart Fan Installed
Factory Set feature if a fan clutch is not installed.
NOTE: The Electronic Viscous option is only
available for Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for
ASET™ AC engine and Step 10 and higher EECU
s/w for ASET™ AI engine (see the “STEP/
SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III”
table on page 34).
Driveshaft Employs special measures (in Range Location If the Driveshaft PTO Dropout feature is disabled, a
PTO Dropout addition to the standard Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU load dump will not be detected by V-MAC, and
Enabled Driveshaft PTO controller) to Default Password engine overspeed will only be limited by the
limit engine overspeed when a Disabled Customer Data (EECU) standard controller.
sudden load dump (release of NOTE: The Driveshaft PTO Dropout feature can
engine load) is detected. interfere with Driveshaft PTO operation and should
only be enabled if there is excessive overspeeding
during a load dump.
Driveshaft Sets the engine acceleration Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher EECU
PTO Dropout threshold for the Driveshaft 1000 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for ASET™
Threshold PTO Dropout option. Default Password AC engine (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
2000 rpm/sec Customer Data (EECU) IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page
34).
NOTE: The Driveshaft PTO Dropout feature can
interfere with Driveshaft PTO operation and should
only be enabled if there is excessive overspeed
during a load dump.
Fuel Enables the fuel temperature Range Location This feature must be enabled for all ASET™ AI
Temperature sensor diagnostics. Enabled/Disable →Customer Data/EECU engines.
Sensor Default Password Not available for ASET™ AC EECU s/w 1MS334
Applied Enabled Customer Data (EECU) and higher.
Oil Level Activates diagnostics for a Range Location
Sensor Jaeger oil level sensor. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Available Default Password

Disabled Customer Data (EECU)
Output Boost Provides a way to transmit Range Location If a boost pressure sensor is installed, enable the
Pressure on boost pressure sensor Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU Output Boost Pressure on J1587 feature.
J1587 information to a service tool. Default Password Not available for ASET™ AC EECU s/w 1MS334
Disabled Customer Data (EECU) and higher.
 CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engine Brake Specifies that an engine brake Range Location NOTE: Do not enable this feature unless an engine
Installed is installed so that V-MAC can Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU brake is installed.
control it properly. Default Password NOTE: Beginning with Step 8 (EECU s/w 1MS327),
Enabled Customer Data (EECU) an engine brake diagnostic will be active whenever
the engine brake is marked as installed. Therefore,
the brake should only be programmed as installed at
initial engine programming if the engine has a brake
system.
NOTE: For ASET™ engines, the engine brake will
not engage until the coolant temperature reaches
125°F.
MACK Specifies that the MACK Range Location NOTE: Do not enable this feature unless a MACK
PowerLeash™ PowerLeash™ engine brake is Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU PowerLeash™ engine brake is installed.
Engine Brake installed so that V-MAC can Default Password NOTE: This feature is available for ASET™ AC
Installed control it properly. Enabled Customer Data (EECU) Step 3 EECU s/w 1MS368 and higher.
Exhaust Specifies that an exhaust Range Location NOTE: Do not enable unless an exhaust brake is
Brake brake is installed so that Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU installed.
Installed V-MAC can control it properly. Default Password This feature is for exports only.
Disabled Customer Data (EECU)
Oil Activates diagnostics for an oil Range Location
Temperature temperature sensor. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU
Sensor Default Password
Available Disabled Customer Data (EECU)
Allow Fan Allows the driver to engage the Range Location Available on E-Tech™ engines with Step 4
Override fan so that fan cycling will not Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU (1MS38P2) EECU s/w only.
When Moving occur while the vehicle is Default Password Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
moving. Disabled Customer Data (EECU) engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
overrides can also be completely disabled.
The override time is set by the Fan Override Time
When Moving parameter.
Fan Override Programs the override time for Range Location Available on E-Tech™ engines with Step 4
Time When the Allow Fan Override When 0 to 1500 seconds →Customer Data/EECU (1MS38P2) EECU s/w only.
Moving Moving option. Default Password Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

60 seconds Customer Data (EECU) engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
overrides can also be completely disabled.

Page 101
 CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 102
Allow Fan Allows the driver to engage the Range Location Available on E-Tech™ engines with Step 4
Override fan so that fan cycling will not Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU (1MS38P2) EECU s/w only.
When Parked occur while the vehicle is Default Password Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
parked (i.e., the driver is Disabled Customer Data (EECU) engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
sleeping). overrides can also be completely disabled.
NOTE: The Allow Fan Override When Parked
feature will automatically disengage above
2100 rpm.
NOTE: The driver cannot overspeed the fan using
the override switch. If the fan is engaged due to the
override and engine speed exceeds any
programmed threshold, the override will be
cancelled.
Air Supports those vehicles that Range Location Available for Step 7 and higher EECU s/w and
Conditioning are not equipped with air Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for ASET™ AC
Installed conditioning but are equipped Default Password engines (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Option with an engine on/off fan. Factory Set Customer Data (EECU) IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page
34).
When disabled and without air conditioning (A/C)
installed, V-MAC will ignore any signal or lack of
signal (12 or 0 volts) from the A/C freon high
pressure switch (located at EJ1-7 of the ASET™ AI
EECU and EJ1-35 on the ASET™ AC EECU) and
will not lock the air operated fan ON. V-MAC will,
however, continue to control the engine on/off fan
through input received from an optional dash-
mounted on/off engine fan switch and customer-
defined input from the Intake Manifold Air
Temperature and Coolant Temperature sensors.
When enabled and with an A/C system and Air
Operated Engine Fan Installed, V-MAC will use
information from the high freon pressure switch
circuit and the other sensor inputs listed above to
help control the customer programmable Smart
Engine Fan functions.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Fuel Calibrates the DataMax™ fuel Range Location Enter the actual amount of fuel used during the last
Calibration usage reported by V-MAC. −20 to +20% →Customer Data/Engine EECU trip in the Actual Trip Fuel field.
Default Password For detailed instructions for determining the actual
0% = no correction Customer Data (EECU) amount of fuel used, refer to “Determining Actual
Fuel Consumed” on page 121.
NOTE: The calibration factor must be between 80
and 120% (the Actual Trip Fuel value entered must
be within 20% of the Calculated Trip Fuel value
displayed). For example, if 100 gallons is displayed
in the Calculated Trip Fuel field, then the Actual Trip
Fuel entered must be between 80 and 120 gallons.

FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Number of ID Sets how many times the Range Location A Co-Pilot or Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™)
Attempts driver can attempt to enter an 1 to 20 attempts →Fleet Data dash display is required for this function to operate.
incorrect driver ID access code Default →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings
before V-MAC shuts down the 3 attempts (Driver ID)
engine. Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Demand Enables the Limited Power Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Driver ID to security mode. V-MAC will limit Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data feature to function.
Operate engine power until a valid Default →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings The power limit for Limited Power mode is
access code is entered. Disabled (Security Mode) programmed in the % Power Limit if No ID Entered
Password option.
Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: If the Demand Driver ID to Operate option is
enabled, the Demand ID to Continue Running
Beyond 30 Seconds option will be disabled. These
two security modes cannot be enabled at the same
time.
Limited Sets the power limit for the Range Location The Demand ID to Operate option must be enabled
Power: % Limited Power security mode; 10 to 50% →Fleet Data for this feature to function.
Power Limit if engine power will be limited to Default →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings For a summary of security options, refer to “Theft
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

No ID Entered this setting until a valid access 50% (Security Mode) Deterrence System Summary” on page 68.
code is entered. Password A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Fleet Data (VECU) feature to function.

Page 103
 FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 104
Demand ID to Enables the Limited Time Range Location The power limit for Limited Time mode is
Continue security mode. V-MAC will limit Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data programmed in the % Power Limit Before Shutdown
Running engine power and shut down Default →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings option.
Beyond after 30 seconds unless a valid Disabled (Security Mode) NOTE: If the Demand ID to Continue Running
30 Seconds access code is entered. Password Beyond 30 Seconds option is enabled, the Demand
Fleet Data (VECU) ID to Operate option will be disabled. These two
security modes cannot be enabled at the same time.
Limited Time: Sets the power limit for the Range Location The Demand ID to Continue Running Beyond
% Power Limit Limited Time security mode; 10 to 50% →Fleet Data 30 Seconds option must be enabled for this feature
Before engine power will be limited to Default →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings to function.
Shutdown this setting until either a valid 20% (Security Mode) For a summary of security options, refer to Theft
access code is entered or Password Deterrence System Summary.
30 seconds pass and the Fleet Data (VECU)
engine shuts down. A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
feature to function.
Access T: Sets the distance threshold Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Distance used by V-MAC to shut down 0 to 50 miles →Fleet Data feature to function and must be enabled in the Fleet
Before the vehicle when a Level T Default →Theft Deterrence Settings Display and Trip Parameters entry form.
Shutdown (theft) access code has been 1 mile (Access Level T)
entered. Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Access T: Sets the distance threshold Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Distance used by V-MAC to turn on the 0 to Distance Before →Fleet Data feature to function and must be enabled in the Fleet
Remaining shutdown warning lamp when Shutdown setting. →Theft Deterrence Settings Display and Trip Parameters entry form.
After a Level T (theft) access code Default (Access Level T) The warning lamp will remain ON for this specified
Shutdown has been entered. 0.5 miles Password distance, after which the engine will shut down.
Lamp ON Fleet Data (VECU)
Access T: Sets the time threshold used Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Time Before by V-MAC to shut down the 0 to 99 min →Fleet Data feature to function and must be enabled in the Fleet
Shutdown vehicle when a Level T (theft) Default →Theft Deterrence Settings Display and Trip Parameters entry form.
access code has been 5 min (Access Level T)
entered. Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Access P: % Sets the engine power limit Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Mechanic when a Level P (power limited) 0 to 100% →Fleet Data feature to function and must be enabled in the Fleet
Power Limit access code has been Default →Theft Deterrence Settings Display and Trip Parameters entry form.
entered. 50% (Access Level P)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
 FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Access S: Sets the engine power limit Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Mechanic when a Level S (speed limited) 10 to 50 mph →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Road Speed access code has been Default →Theft Deterrence Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Limit entered. 12 mph (Access Level S) A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Password feature to function and must be enabled in the Fleet
Fleet Data (VECU) Display and Trip Parameters entry form.
NOTE: V-MAC will not allow the Low Idle Speed
setting (programmed in SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS)
to be overridden.

FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Vehicle Specifies what type of dash Range Location Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) is available for
Display Type display, if any, is installed. None, Co-Pilot, V.I.P.™ →Fleet Data Step 5 and higher VECU s/w (see the “STEP/
Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III”
None (Display Options) table on page 34).
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Advance to Allows the driver to advance to Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Next Trip via the next trip by pressing a Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data feature to function.
Display button on the Co-Pilot/V.I.P.™ Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set to
Enabled (Display Options) Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Password Specifying a new trip will close the current trip and
Fleet Data (VECU) advance DataMax™ to the next trip. DataMax™ can
store up to 12 trips for Steps 5–7 VECU s/w, up to
10 trips for Steps 8–9B and up to 4 trips for Step 10
and higher VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34)
only.
Reset Allows the driver to clear trip Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
DataMax™ information (stored in the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w only and also requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
via V.I.P.™ vehicle data log) by pressing a Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings DataMax™ can store up to 12 trips for Steps 5–7
button on the V.I.P.™ Disabled (Display Options) VECU s/w, up to 10 trips for Steps 8–9B VECU s/w,
Password and up to 4 trips for Step 10 and higher VECU s/w
(see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Fleet Data (VECU)

FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set to
V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.

Page 105
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Driver Reset Allows the driver to reset Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU

Page 106
Maintenance maintenance issues by Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Items via pressing a button on the Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and also
V.I.P.™ V.I.P.™ Disabled (Display Options) requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Password The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set to
Fleet Data (VECU) V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
This feature is automatically available when the
Owner-Operator Program Group is selected (Step 8
VECU s/w and higher).
Reset Driver Allows the driver to reset driver Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Trip via V.I.P.™ trip information (stored in Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
DataMax™) by pressing a Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and also
button on the V.I.P.™ Enabled (Display Options) requires a V.I.P.™ dash display. DataMax™ stores
Two Driver Display trips exist Password up to 2 Driver Display trips.
that can be viewed on the Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
V.I.P.™ This option permits the to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
driver to reset his/her
displayed trip(s) by pressing a
button on the V.I.P.™
Display Trip Allows the driver to display one Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Information current trip information on the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
on V.I.P.™ V.I.P.™ Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and requires
Enabled (Display Options) V.I.P.™ dash display.
Password NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
Fleet Data (VECU) to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Enable Enables or disables “Sweet Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Sweet Spot Spot” information display on Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Indicator on the V.I.P.™ Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
V.I.P.™ V-MAC will transfer “Sweet Enabled (Display Options) When enabled, the V.I.P.™ indicator status will
Spot” indicator lamp real time Password illuminate when the engine is operating at top
across J1587 for use by the Fleet Data (VECU) efficiency (the “Sweet Spot”) for the amount of
V.I.P.™ and/or dash LCD when power required.
this feature is enabled.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Programming Allows the user to select Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Options via V.I.P.™ programming options NO OPTIONS, Fleet →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
V.I.P.™ via a packaged group. Programming Group or →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and requires
Owner-Operator (Parameters Programmed in a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Programming Group V.I.P.™ Options) The Fleet Programming Group package contains
Default Password the following features:
NONE Fleet Data (VECU) 앫 Autoresume with Clutch (allows the driver to
reprogram Cruise Control Autoresume via the
V.I.P.™)
앫 Engine Brake Delay in Cruise (allows the
Engine Brake Delay in Cruise to be enabled/
disabled via the V.I.P.™)
앫 Governor Type (permits the governor type to
be selected via the V.I.P.™)
앫 Idle Cooldown (allows Idle Cooldown to be
enabled via the V.I.P.™)
앫 Low Idle Speed Setting (For Step 8 and higher
VECU s/w [see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on
page 34] only. Allows the user to change the
engine low idle speed via the V.I.P.™)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 107
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Programming The Owner-Operator Programming Group package

Page 108
Options via contains the above Fleet Programming Group
V.I.P.™ features and includes the following additional
(continued) features:
앫 Clear Electronic Faults (allows the user to
clear faults via the V.I.P.™)
앫 Cruise Control Maximum Speed (permits the
user to reprogram the Cruise Control
Maximum via the V.I.P.™)
앫 Fuel Calibration (allows the user to reset the
EECU Fuel Calibration correction via the
V.I.P.™)
앫 Fuel Economy Target (permits the user to
program the Fuel Economy Target via the
V.I.P.™)
앫 Fuel Economy Type (allows the user to
choose the Fuel Economy Type via the
V.I.P.™)
앫 Idle Shutdown (permits the Idle Shutdown to
be enabled/disabled via the V.I.P.™)
앫 Maintenance Reset via V.I.P.™ (allows the
driver to reset maintenance issues via the
V.I.P.™)
앫 Road Speed Limit (permits the driver to
reprogram the vehicle road speed limit via the
V.I.P.™)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Reset Allows the driver to reset Range Location If available, Predictive Oil Change is a standalone
Predictive Oil Predictive Oil Change using Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data feature and available for CV, DM and RB models
Change via the override switch. Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings with Step 8, 1MS336 or higher VECU s/w.
Override Disabled Password NOTE: Predictive Oil Change is suited for chassis
Switch Fleet Data (VECU) only that meet the following requirements:
앫 The engine is equipped with a 28-quart oil
pan.
앫 A Mack filtration system is used with dual full
flow elements and a Centri-Max® spinner
filter.
앫 The engine uses approved EO-M+ oil for pre-
2002 emissions and EO-N Premium Plus for
ASET™ AI engines.
앫 Oil consumption is 3000 miles per quart or
better.
앫 The engine does not have a problem with oil
dilution.
앫 Engine ECU software is NOT 1MS334,
1MS334A, 1MS363, 1MS368, 1MS368A,
1MS375, or 1MS378
앫 The correct VECU data file has been installed
to match the engine — ask your MACK dealer.
To operate this feature, enable Predictive Oil in OEM
Data on the main frame via the F3 Update Option
screen of V-MAC and in this location of CDP.
NOTE: Predictive Oil Change is not available for MR
and LE models. Predictive Oil Change must NOT be
enabled if the engine ECU software is 1MS334,
1MS334A, 1MS363, 1MS368, 1MS368A, 1MS375,
or 1MS378.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 109
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
GuardDog™ Enables the GuardDog™ Range Location This feature is available for E-Tech™ engines with

Page 110
Enabled maintenance function. Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data VECU s/w 1MS349 and for ASET™ AI engines with
Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings VECU s/w 1MS364 and data file 1MS371 only and
Enabled when enabled (GuardDog™ Parameters) also requires that the vehicle have a version 3.0
in OEM Data Password V.I.P.™ display with 1MS351 software.
Fleet Data (VECU) The following are the available GuardDog™ VECU-
supported sensors:
앫 Brake Pad Wear (optional for CH, CV and CX
series only)
앫 Coolant Level Low
앫 Fuel Level
앫 Wiper Fluid Level (for CH, CV and CX series
only)
The following are the available GuardDog™ EECU-
supported sensors:
앫 Air Restriction (for CH, CV and CX series
only)
앫 Oil Level (for CH, CV and CX series only)
— To operate this feature, enable
GuardDog™ in OEM Data on the main
frame via the F3 Update Option screen
of V-MAC and in this location of CDP.
GuardDog™ Sets the threshold percentage Range Location This feature is available for E-Tech™ engines with
Low Fuel for the GuardDog™ Low Fuel 1 to 50% →Fleet Data VECU s/w 1MS349 and for ASET™ AI engines with
Level Warning Warning Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings VECU s/w 1MS364 and data file 1MS371 only and
Threshold % 13% (GuardDog™ Parameters) also requires that the GuardDog™ function be
Password enabled.
Fleet Data (VECU)
Fleet Fuel Sets the fleet reference fuel Range Location
Economy economy value. 0 to 25 mpg →Fleet Data
Target Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
7.0 mpg Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Driver Allows the user to select what Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Incentive driver incentive function is Disabled, Incentive →Fleet Data VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
enabled. Mode, Penalty Mode, →Fleet Display and Trip Settings NOTE: This feature works best when used with a
Incentive and Penalty Password V.I.P.™ display, which can notify the driver when the
Mode Vehicle Data (VECU) vehicle road speed is either in incentive or penalty
Default mode.
Disabled Disabled: No incentive plan.
Incentive Mode: Vehicle speed limit and cruise
maximum speed can be increased if recent fuel
mileage exceeds a target. Once the speeds are
increased, they will remain at higher values until the
recent fuel mileage drops below a threshold.
Penalty Mode: Vehicle speed limit and cruise
maximum speed can be decreased if the driver fails
to maintain a minimum fuel mileage level. Once the
speeds are decreased, they will remain at “below
baseline” levels until the fuel mileage improves.
Incentive and Penalty Mode: Both modes are
enabled. However, the V.I.P.™ will display the
Incentive mpg only when this parameter is selected.
NOTE: For the Driver Incentive function and its
related Driver Incentive features to work, it must first
be turned on in OEM data. Finally, it must be
selected in Customer Data Programming.
1. Access the MACK database using V-MAC
Online and enter the V-MAC F3 Update
Options screen.
2. Set MPG Incentive Program to “Y” for YES.
(This option applies to all the Driver Incentive-
related features available in V-MAC Customer
Data Programming.)
3. Download the VECU reprogramming data file
to your computer’s hard drive using V-MAC
Online.
4. Program the VECU reprogramming data file
into the VECU using V-MAC Dealer
Programming software.
5. Upload the VECU verification file to the MACK
database using V-MAC Online.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

6. Enable the Driver Incentive function by

selecting the desired mode in Fleet Data —
Display and Trip Settings entry form. If you fail
to perform this last task, the other driver
incentive-related features (found in Vehicle
Component Parameters and Cruise Control
Features) will not appear in Customer Data
Programming.

Page 111
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Driver NOTE: When the Driver Incentive function is

Page 112
Incentive enabled, you must also set the following Driver
(continued) Incentive-related features:
In Vehicle Component Parameters, set the Incentive
Increase in Road Speed Limit, Penalty Decrease in
Road Speed Limit, and Speed Limit Adjustment
Rate features (see page 76).
In Cruise Control Features, set the Incentive
Increase in Cruise Max Speed and Penalty
Decrease in Cruise Max Speed features (see
pages 88 and 89).
Incentive-to- Returns Vehicle Speed and Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Base Cruise Maximum Speed limits 0.05 to 0.5 mpg →Fleet Data VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Hysteresis to their base levels if fuel Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings This parameter prevents the incentive vehicle speed
economy falls below the fleet 0.1 mpg Password limit for being added or removed too often by placing
fuel economy target. Vehicle Data (VECU) a hysteresis band around the fuel economy (reward)
target.
For example, if the driver is being rewarded, the
running mpg average would have to dip below the
target minus this value before the increased vehicle
speed and cruise maximum speed limits are
removed.
NOTE: The Driver Incentive function must be
selected for this feature to function.
Fleet Fuel Applies a penalty decrease in Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Economy the Vehicle Speed and Cruise 0 to 25 mpg →Fleet Data VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Penalty Maximum Speed limits if fuel Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings This parameter is the fleet fuel economy “lower” or
Threshold economy falls below the Fleet 5.0 mpg Password penalty target mpg. When this parameter is enabled,
Fuel Economy Penalty Vehicle Data (VECU) the maximum attainable vehicle speed will be
Threshold value. reduced if the driver doesn’t surpass the set
threshold.
NOTE: The Driver Incentive function must be
selected for this feature to function.
Penalty-to- Returns Vehicle Speed and Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Base Cruise MaxSpeed Limits to 0.05 to 0.5 mpg →Fleet Data VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Hysteresis their base levels if fuel Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings This parameter prevents the “penalty” Vehicle
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

economy rises above the Fleet 0.1 mpg Password Speed limit for being added or removed too often by
Fuel Economy Penalty Vehicle Data (VECU) placing a hysteresis band around the fuel economy
Threshold. (penalty) target
For example, if the driver is being penalized, the
running mpg average would have to rise above the
penalty threshold plus this value before the normal
vehicle speed limit is restored.
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Incentive/ Uses a range in miles to Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
Penalty Fuel determine if the vehicle speed 20 to 250 miles →Fleet Data VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
Economy limit should be in incentive or Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings Example: If the sample size is set to 25 miles, the
Sample Size penalty mode based on the 25 miles Password last 25 miles of data is viewed to determine the
rolling mpg average. Vehicle Data (VECU) rolling mpg average. This rolling mpg average is
then compared to the incentive or penalty mpg
thresholds.
Data Save Determines how DataMax™ Range Location Wrap Around — DataMax™ will wrap back to trip 1
Mode logs additional trip information Wrap Around, Stop After →Fleet Data and overwrite the information.
(beyond 10 trips). Last Trip, Leave Last Trip →Fleet Display and Trip Settings Stop After Last Trip — DataMax™ will discontinue
Open Password logging information until trip information is reset.
Default Fleet Data (VECU) Leave Last Trip Open — DataMax™ will leave the
Wrap Around last trip open (i.e., the driver will not be able to
advance to the next trip) until trip information is
reset.
Idle Data Type Sets the type of idle data that Range Location Total Idle — Logged when the engine is running and
on V.I.P.™ will be displayed on the V.I.P.™ Total Idle, True Idle, →Fleet Data no vehicle speed.
Qualified Idle →Fleet Display and Trip Settings *True Idle — Logged when PTO 1 and PTO 2 are
Default Password OFF, speed control is disabled, the engine is
Total Idle Fleet Data (VECU) running, accelerator pedal position is less than 2%
and no vehicle speed. (* Not available with Step 10
and higher VECU s/w.)
Qualified Idle — Logged when the engine has idled
for longer than the Idle Logging Delay threshold.
This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and also
requires V.I.P.™ dash display.
NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Request Programs V-MAC to request a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Driver Name driver name every time the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
at Every engine is started. Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and also
Startup? Disabled Password requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Source of Describes the source of the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Driver Name driver trip names for Do not attach a name, →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
for Trip DataMax™ tracking purposes. Use theft deterrence ID, →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and also
Use list of names, Use a Password requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
driver entered code Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
Default to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Use theft deterrence ID

Page 113
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Length of Sets the length of all driver Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU

Page 114
Driver Trip entered trip codes. 1 to 10 characters →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Code Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only and also
None Password requires V.I.P.™ dash display.
Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set
to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Maintenance Determines when Range Location Examples of time zone offsets:
Reminder maintenance alert reminders Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data 앫 Eastern/Standard (−5)
Broadcast will be broadcast; after the Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
Schedule initial alert has been 앫 Australia (+10)
Disabled Password
broadcast, the alert will also be Fleet Data (VECU)
broadcast every time the
vehicle is started. In addition,
the user can program V-MAC
to broadcast a reminder alert
at specified times each day
(4 a.m., 8 a.m., 12 p.m., etc). If
the specified time is enabled,
the maintenance alert will be
broadcast at that time.
Blackout Enables Alert Blackout mode, Range Location Alert Blackout mode is generally used to suppress
Mode which suppresses all Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data maintenance alerts while the driver is sleeping.
Enabled maintenance alerts issued Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings The start and stop times for Alert Blackout mode are
during a set period of time. Disabled Password set in the Alert Blackout Mode Start Time and Alert
Fleet Data (VECU) Blackout Mode Stop Time parameters.
Alert Blackout Sets the time for the beginning Range Location Alert Blackout mode must be enabled for this
Start Time of Alert Blackout mode. 12:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. →Fleet Data parameter to be set (see Blackout Mode Enabled).
hours →Fleet Display and Trip Settings Any alerts that were issued after the Alert Blackout
Default (Blackout Options) Start Time threshold was reached will be
8:00 p.m. Password disregarded until the Alert Blackout Stop Time
Fleet Data (VECU) threshold is reached.
Alert Blackout Sets the time for the ending of Range Location Alert Blackout mode must be enabled for this
Stop Time Alert Blackout mode. 12:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. →Fleet Data parameter to be set (see Blackout Mode Enabled).
hours →Fleet Display and Trip Settings Any alerts that were issued after the Alert Blackout
Default (Blackout Options) Start Time threshold was reached will be
8:00 p.m. Password disregarded until the Alert Blackout Stop Time
Fleet Data (VECU) threshold is reached.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location The Engine Overspeed, Company Limit threshold is
Overspeed, Engine Overspeed, Company 1500 to 2500 rpm →Fleet Data often set at rated engine speed, or typically
Company Limit condition (overspeed Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings 1800 rpm.
Limit beyond the fleet’s 2150 rpm (Overspeed Options) DataMax™ will log the total accumulated
recommended target). Password overspeeds, and also the maximum value for the
Fleet Data (VECU) current trip.
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location DataMax™ will log the number of occurrences and
Overspeed Engine Overspeed (Severe) 1500 to 2500 rpm →Fleet Data the maximum overspeed value for the life of the
Logging condition. Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings vehicle.
(Severe) 2500 rpm (Overspeed Options)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Overspeed Fueled Engine Overspeed 1500 to 2150 rpm →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Logging with condition. Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Fuel 2150 rpm (Overspeed Options) DataMax™ will log the total accumulated time that
Password the vehicle was in overspeed during the trip.
Fleet Data (VECU) The Engine Overspeed Logging with Fuel parameter
is useful for tracking engine overspeeds when the
engine brake is not on.
Vehicle Sets the threshold for the Range Location DataMax™ logs the total accumulated time that the
Overspeed Fueled Vehicle Overspeed 40 to 100 mph →Fleet Data vehicle was in overspeed during the trip.
Logging with condition (with fuel being Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings The Vehicle Overspeed Logging with Fuel threshold
Fuel supplied, rather than when 65 mph (Overspeed Options) is useful if the company provides incentives to drive
moving downhill). Password below the Road Speed Limit setting.
Fleet Data (VECU)
Vehicle Sets the threshold for the Range Location DataMax™ logs the total accumulated time that the
Overspeed Vehicle Overspeed, All 40 to 100 mph →Fleet Data vehicle was in overspeed, the number of
Logging, All Conditions state (the fleet’s Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings occurrences and the maximum value happening
Conditions recommended limit under any 80 mph (Overspeed Options) during the current trip.
circumstances). Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Idle Logging Sets the threshold for a Range Location Refer to the Idle Data Type on V.I.P.™ feature for
Delay qualified idle; if the engine 0 to 1092 minutes →Fleet Data idle type definitions.
idles longer than the specified Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
time period, it will be logged as 0 (Overspeed Options)
a qualified idle. Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Hard Braking Sets the deceleration Range Location
Threshold threshold for hard braking; −12 to −1 mph/sec →Fleet Data
when deceleration exceeds Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
this value, V-MAC will log a (Overspeed Options)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

−8 mph/sec
hard braking occurrence. Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Traction Loss Sets the threshold for traction Range Location
Threshold loss; when acceleration 1 to 12 mph/sec →Fleet Data
exceeds this value, a traction Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
loss occurrence will be logged. 8 mph/sec Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

Page 115
 FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Custom To support special Range Location

Page 116
Parameters requirements, a Custom 0 to 65535 →Fleet Data
Defined Statement may be Default →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
provided as part of the 0 (Overspeed Settings)
vehicle's original build. Some Password
statements contain settings Fleet Data (VECU)
that are programmed in the
Custom Parameter 1 and
Custom Parameter 2 fields.
‘

FLEET DATA — DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Once per Day Driver Event summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
at a specified time each day. Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Enabled (Fleet Driver Event Summary) The exact time of day is specified in the Driver Event
Password Summary Time parameter.
Fleet Data (VECU)
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
When Key Driver Event summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Turned ON each time the key is turned on. Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Disabled (Fleet Driver Event Summary)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
at Next Trip/ Driver Event summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trip Reset at the start of a new trip. Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Disabled (Fleet Driver Event Summary)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 10 and higher
at Next Driver Driver Events summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data VECU s/w (see the table on page 34) only.
each time a new driver starts. Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings
Disabled (Fleet Driver Event Summary)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Sets the time of day when the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Summary daily report will be generated. 0:00 to 23:00 (GMT) →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Time Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
0:00 Password The Write Report Once per Day option must be
Fleet Data (VECU) enabled for this feature to function.
 FLEET DATA — DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception PTO 1 is engaged. Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
PTO 1 Disabled (Driver Event Exception
Engaged Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception PTO 2 is engaged. Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
PTO 2 Disabled (Driver Event Exception
Engaged Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Fueled Engine Overspeed Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: threshold is exceeded. Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Fueled Disabled (Driver Event Exception
Engine Speed Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Engine Overspeed Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: (Severe) threshold is Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Severe exceeded. Enabled (Driver Event Exception
Engine Speed Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Engine Overspeed, Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: Company Limit threshold is Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Company exceeded. Disabled (Driver Event Exception
Limit Engine Triggers)
Speed Password
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Fleet Data (VECU)

Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Fueled Vehicle Overspeed Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: threshold is exceeded. Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Fueled Disabled (Driver Event Exception
Vehicle Triggers)
Overspeed Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

Page 117
 FLEET DATA — DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 118
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Vehicle Overspeed, All Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: Conditions threshold is Default →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Vehicle exceeded. Disabled (Driver Event Exception
Overspeed All Triggers)
Conditions Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event These parameters set which Up to 10 items may be Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Summary List items will be included in the selected. →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Driver Event summary report. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34) only.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

FLEET DATA — INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER SETTINGS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Incident Log These parameters are used to Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Filter and customize the triggers for the →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger incident log. →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Settings Settings NOTE: Unless the incident log is being triggered
Password incorrectly, a change to these settings is not
Fleet Data (VECU) recommended.
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Engine Speed 10 to 200 rpm →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Increase Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Trigger 50 rpm Settings
Threshold Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Engine Speed −200 to −10 rpm →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Decrease Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Trigger −50 rpm Settings
Threshold Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle Speed 0.5 to 25 mph →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Increase Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Trigger 1 mph Settings
Threshold Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
 FLEET DATA — INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle Speed −25 to −0.5 mph →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Decrease Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Trigger −1 mph Settings
Threshold Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle 0.5 to 100 mph/sec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Acceleration Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Trigger 10 mph Settings
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle −100 to −0.5 mph/sec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Deceleration Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Trigger −10 mph Settings
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Trigger 100 to 2500 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Sample Time Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
100 msec Settings
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Recording 100 to 2500 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Rate Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
500 msec Settings
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Engine Speed 1639 to 65535 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Filter Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
Settings
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

6556 msec
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

Page 119
 FLEET DATA — INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 120
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle Speed 1639 to 65535 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Filter Default →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 34).
6556 msec Settings
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

FLEET DATA — CUSTOMER DEFINED LABELS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Customer Allows the user to define the Location Type in the desired name for each label. These
Defined CUST DEF 1 and CUST →Fleet Data names will appear in the Maintenance Monitor
Labels DEF 2 labels in the →Maintenance Customer Defined schedule.
Maintenance Monitor Labels
schedule. Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

FLEET DATA — DRIVER ID SETTINGS

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Driver ID Allows the user to assign driver Access Levels: Location 1. Type in the individual driver ID.
Settings IDs and access restriction F — Full Access →Fleet Data 2. Select the appropriate access level.
levels. P — Power Limited →Program Driver ID Settings 3. Click on the Next ID button for next driver.
S — Speed Limited Password
T — Theft 4. Click on the Clear IDs button to clear ID.
Fleet Data (VECU)
NOTE: Use the following access restriction levels as
described below.
앫 Access Level F — Is used for full access.
앫 Access Levels P or S — Is used for limited
access.
앫 Access Level T — Is used when someone is
attempting to steal the vehicle.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Determining Actual Fuel Consumed Vehicle Operation

To use the fuel calibration feature, an accurate Operate the vehicle for a minimum of 500 miles,
determination of fuel consumption must first be or until at least half the available fuel has been
made by performing these steps: consumed. The more fuel consumed, the more
앫 Initial Fuel Fill accurate the calibration factor will be.

앫 Vehicle Operation
앫 Final Fuel Fill
For the best results, several tanks of fuel may be
Initial Fuel Fill consumed. For these intermediate fills, it is only
necessary to use an accurate filling station
1. Allow the vehicle to sit overnight, or for a (preferably the same station that was used for the
minimum of eight hours, so that the fuel in initial fill) and record the amount of fuel added.
the tanks has had time to cool to ambient
temperature.
2. Move the vehicle to the fueling station and Final Fuel Fill
shut off the engine. 1. Allow the vehicle to sit overnight so that the
The vehicle should be parked on a level fuel in the tank(s) has a chance to cool.
surface. If there is any question about the For optimum accuracy, ambient temperature
surface being level, make a chalk mark on for the final fill should be equal to, or 10°
the pavement to indicate the location of the lower than, the ambient temperature when
front axle. This reference point will be used the fuel tank(s) was initially filled.
when the vehicle is brought back for the final
fuel fill. The pump used to dispense the fuel 2. Move the vehicle to the same filling station
should be accurate, and should be the pump that was used for the initial fuel. If applicable,
that is normally used to fill the vehicle. place the front axle over the chalk marks.
Close the fuel tank connecting line valve if
3. If the vehicle is equipped with dual fuel the vehicle is equipped with dual fuel tanks.
tanks, close the connecting line valve.
3. Fill the fuel tank(s) to the exact same level
as the initial fill (level with the bottom
outboard side [low side] of the fuel filler
neck).
On dual tank dual-draw systems, it may be
necessary to check the fuel level in both tanks on 4. Reopen the fuel tank connecting line valve.
initial fill and final fill. 5. Record the fuel meter reading. Then add the
amount of fuel recorded for any intermediate
4. Dispense fuel into the tank(s) until the level fills. This figure represents the actual fuel
of fuel just contacts the bottom outboard consumed.
(low side) of the fuel filler neck.
Do not overfill. The more accurate and
consistent the initial and final fills are, the
more accurate the data will be. If equipped
with dual fuel tanks, accurately fill both
tanks. Then open the fuel tank connecting
line valve.
5. Reset the trip values in the DataMax™ log.

Page 121
 NOTES

Page 122
DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

Page 123
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
DEALER PROGRAMMING DEALER GENERAL
PROGRAMMING
Introduction INFORMATION
V-MAC Dealer Programming Software, which
supports V-MAC I, V-MAC II and V-MAC III, Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
allows the user to reprogram the data file or
software file for an ECU. In the previous (DOS) The V-MAC I and II system had one ECU, but the
versions of V-MAC support software, Dealer V-MAC III system has both an engine ECU and a
Programming Software was divided into two vehicle ECU. Because V-MAC III requires
separate programs: MACK DATA separate programming for each ECU,
PROGRAMMING (MDP) and PRODUCT programming procedures have been modified to
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING (PSP). With the allow the user to program each ECU individually.
Windows version of Dealer Programming
Software, both MDP and PSP functions are
provided in one program ( DEALER
PROGRAMMING). Version 2.9.12 covers When the VECU is reprogrammed, ensure that
V-MAC I, II and III. you save and restore the Customer Data
information because odometer mileage will be
lost.
ACCESSING DEALER PROGRAMMING
SOFTWARE
There are two ways to access DEALER V-MAC III Configuration
PROGRAMMING.
앫 If there is a Mack Software folder on the To determine the current system configuration,
desktop, double-click on the folder. Then use the following steps:
double-click V-MAC Dealer Programming 1. Determine the VECU Purchase P/N — Look
Software. at the part number next to ASS'Y w/SW on
앫 If there is no icon on the desktop, access the the VECU label.
start menu and select Programs and select 2. Determine the EECU Purchase P/N — Look
Mack Programs and V-MAC Dealer at the part number on the EECU label.
Programming Software. Then click V-MAC
Dealer Programming. 3. Determine the VECU Hardware and
Software P/Ns — Access the MACK
database using V-MAC Online. Click on the
ONLINE HELP FUNCTION Vehicle Information for Class 6-7-8. Then
This version of V-MAC support software features select the F11 Vehicle ECU Part Number
an online help function (similar to Windows Help). Change entry form from the Electronically
The online help includes all of the information Controlled Vehicles menu. Look at the part
contained in this user guide. Simply press F1 to number displayed next to VECU H/W Part
view the help topics. Number and look at the software part
number displayed next to Software Version.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4. Determine the EECU Hardware and

Software P/Ns — Access the MACK
The current V-MAC III Service Manual, 8-211, database using V-MAC Online. Click on the
provides a complete description of the operation Vehicle Information for Class 6-7-8. Then
of the V-MAC III system, as well as instructions select the F9 Vehicle ECU Part Number
for performing diagnostics and repair of system Change entry form from the Electronically
components. Controlled Vehicles menu. Look at the part
number displayed next to EECU H/W Part
The phone number for the V-MAC Software Number and look at the software part
Support Center is (800) 247-0039. Hours are number displayed next to Software Version.
8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (Eastern time), Monday
through Friday.

Page 124
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
V-MAC II Configuration
To determine the current system configuration,
use the following steps: To determine the Vehicle Information Profiler
(V.I.P.™) software version, access the V.I.P.™
1. Determine the ECU Purchase P/N — Look display and follow these steps:
at the “V-MAC II CONFIGURATION” table
on page 126, and refer to the Hardware P/N 1. From the main menu, select General
and Software P/N. Information and click the Enter button.
2. Determine the ECU Hardware P/N — Look 2. Select Vehicle ID and click the Enter button.
at the part number on the ECU label. View the V.I.P.™ part number and software
version.
3. Determine the ECU Software P/N — Look at
the ECU Software Version field in the
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Vehicle
Information display screen.

V-MAC III CONFIGURATION TABLE

Vehicle ECU
Step VECU Purchase P/N VECU Hardware P/N VECU Software P/N
4 12MS411M2 12MS48M2 1MS312A
5 12MS411M3 12MS48M3 1MS316A
6 12MS411M4 12MS48M4 1MS320
7 12MS411M5 12MS48M5 1MS328
8 12MS411M6 12MS48M6 1MS336
8A 12MS411M7 12MS48M6 1MS336A
9 12MS411M8 12MS48M6 1MS349
9B* 12MS411M9 12MS48M6 1MS364
10* 12MS411M10 12MS48M6 1MS369
11* 12MS411M11 12MS48M6 1MS376
Engine ECU
Step EECU Purchase P/N EECU Hardware P/N EECU Software P/N
2† 12MS520M 12MS415M 1MS334
3† 12MS528M 12MS425M 1MS368
3A† 12MS528AM 12MS425AM 1MS368A
4† 12MS532M 12MS425M 1MS378
4 12MS510M2 12MS410M2 1MS38P2
5 12MS514M 12MS410M2 1MS317
7 12MS517M 12MS410M2 1MS326
7A 12MS517AM 12MS410M2 1MS326A
12MS517BM
8 12MS518M 12MS413M 1MS327
12MS523M& 12MS413AM&
9* 12MS526M 12MS413AM 1MS363
10 12MS530M 12MS426M 1MS375

* For ASET™ AI engines

† For ASET™ AC engines
& For integral barometric sensor

Page 125
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
V-MAC II CONFIGURATION TABLE
ECU
Step ECU Purchase P/N ECU Hardware P/N ECU Software P/N
4 12MS59M6 12MS54M5 1MS34A
12MS59M7 12MS59M5 1MS34B
12MS59M8 12MS59M6 1MS34B
6 12MS59M9 12MS59M7 1MS36
7 12MS59M10 12MS54M7 1MS39
8 12MS59M11 12MS54M7 1MS315

V-MAC I AND FIC CONFIGURATION TABLE

V-MAC I MODULE
Hardware P/N Software P/N Production Date
12MS51M VMP100 02-1990*
12MS51M2 VMP101 11-1990
12MS51M3 VMP111 10-1991
12MS51M4 VMP111 08-1992
12MS51M5 VMP111 09-1992
12MS51M6 VMP121 06-1993
12MS51M7 VMP121 11-1993
FIC MODULE
Hardware P/N Software P/N Production Date
12MS45M SW011V23 02-1990*
12MS45M2 SW011V25 11-1990
12MS45M3 B0101V10** 10-1991
12MS45M4 B0101V12 09-1992
12MS45M5 B0101V12 11-1993

* – No longer in use
** – Software version changes when programmed with Mack Dealer Programming ver. 3.4.

Dealer Programming File The data file-programming portion of Dealer

Programming uses three different types of files:
Nomenclature
앫 A customer data file is created whenever
Dealer programming software consists of two you save customer parameters.
programming portions: product software and data
file programming. Both kinds of programming 앫 A reprogramming (reference) data file is
have different file types. The product software file- downloaded from the MACK database via
programming portion of Dealer Programming V-MAC Online and reprograms the ECU
uses two different types of files: data.

앫 A customer data file is created whenever 앫 A verification file is created after

you save customer parameters. programming is completed. It is then
uploaded to the MACK database via V-MAC
앫 A product software file is downloaded from Online.
the MACK database via V-MAC Online and
reprograms (flashes) the ECU software or
V.I.P.™ software.

Page 126
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
THE DATA FILE EXTENSION Below are data file extension tables for V-MAC III
class 8 vehicles. Use these tables to identify files
Each data file has a name and is recognized by
when saving customer data or downloading,
its file extension, or the last three characters that
programming and uploading from and to the
are separated by a period. For example, the
MACK database.
familiar Word document file extension is always
identified by “.doc.”

For MACK programming files, the file extension

reflects the type of data file it is and the ECU it is Files may vary in size from version to version.
associated with. For example, the V-MAC III The software is designed to adjust to different
class 8 vehicle programming data file is always sizes and remains operational.
identified by “.rfv,” or reprogramming file, for
vehicle.

V-MAC III DATA FILE EXTENSIONS

File Type VECU Extension EECU Extension
Customer Data File .dtv .dte
Reprogramming Data File .rfv .rfe
Verification Data File .vev .vee
Product Software File .sfv .sfe

V-MAC I AND II DATA FILE EXTENSIONS

File Type ECU Extension
Customer Data File .dta
Reprogramming Data File .ref
Verification Data File .ver
Product Software File .prd
Extension File (V-MAC II only) .ext

V.I.P.™ DATA FILE EXTENSIONS

File Type V.I.P.™ Extension
Product Software File .vip

Page 127
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
V-MAC Dealer Programming Phases
Both product software programming and data file
programming involve phases. For vehicles with Step 4 or Step 5 (1MS38P2 and
1MS317 EECU) software, be sure to disable the
Idle Shutdown parameter in Customer Data
PRODUCT SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING (PSP) Programming prior to programming the modules.
Reprogramming a product software file involves Failure to do so may result in possible
three distinct phases: programming failure and damage to the modules.
1. The first phase is downloading.
Downloading is receiving a product software
file from the MACK database and DEALER PROGRAMMING
transferring the file to your PC using V-MAC SOFTWARE COMPUTER
Online. REQUIREMENTS
2. The second phase is saving customer data. Programming with Dealer Programming Software
Saving a customer data file is done prior to has two requirements:
programming the ECU using V-MAC Dealer
Programming software. 앫 V-MAC Online access (via MACKnet)

3. The third phase is programming. 앫 V-MAC® Support Software for Windows

(current version)
Programming (flashing) is loading a product
software file that was downloaded from the For other computer requirements, please refer to
MACK database into the ECU using V-MAC “SOFTWARE INSTALLATION SPECIAL TOOLS
Dealer Programming software. AND EQUIPMENT” on page 8.

DATA FILE PROGRAMMING (MDP)

DEALER PROGRAMMING
Reprogramming a data file is similar to product
software programming, but involves three distinct
SOFTWARE VISUAL
phases: IDENTIFICATION
1. The first phase is downloading.
Dealer Programming Software
Downloading is receiving a data file from the
MACK database and transferring the file to Screen Summaries
your PC using V-MAC Online. V-MAC DEALER PROGRAMMING MENU
2. The second phase is programming. 83

Programming is loading a data file that was

downloaded from the MACK database into
the ECU using V-MAC Dealer Programming
software.
3. The third phase is uploading.
Uploading is transferring a verification data
file (created during programming with
V-MAC Dealer Programming software) from
your PC to the MACK database using
V-MAC Online.

Figure 83 — V-MAC Dealer Programming Menu

Page 128
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
To view the available programming options (refer PROGRAMMING BAR
to “PROGRAMMING BAR” on page 129), click on 85
Programming from the toolbar at the top of the
screen or click on the V-MAC Navigator bar
located vertically to the left of the screen (refer to
“V-MAC NAVIGATOR BAR” on page 129 for
detailed instructions on how to use the Navigator
bar).

To save customer data and view the available

programming options, click on Utilities from the
toolbar or click on the V-MAC Navigator bar
located vertically to the left of the screen to
access the Utilities bar (refer to “UTILITIES BAR”
on page 130).

V-MAC NAVIGATOR BAR

84
Figure 85 — V-MAC Programming Bar

Click on Program V-MAC OEM Data

(AutoDetect) to let the system detect the V-MAC
level and type required for the attached vehicle
and to program the VECU or EECU (as
appropriate) with a reprogramming data file (refer
to “PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA ENTRY
FORM” on page 134).

Click on Program V-MAC III VECU OEM Data to

program the VECU with a reprogramming data
file (refer to “PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA
ENTRY FORM” on page 134).

Click on Program V-MAC III EECU OEM Data to

program the EECU with a reprogramming data
Figure 84 — V-MAC Navigator Bar
file (refer to “PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA
ENTRY FORM” on page 134).
The V-MAC Navigator tool is a sliding vertical bar
containing the available programming functions
Click on Program V-MAC II OEM Data to
and utility options.
program the ECU with a reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA
Click on theV-MAC Navigator bar (a vertical bar
ENTRY FORM” on page 134).
on the left-hand side of the DEALER
PROGRAMMING Menu) to “slide” out the bar for
Click on Program V-MAC I OEM Data to program
viewing.
the ECU with a reprogramming data file (refer to
“PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA ENTRY
Click on the V-MAC Programming bar to view
FORM” on page 134).
the available programming options (refer to
“PROGRAMMING BAR” on page 129).
Click on Program ITC OEM Data to program the
ECU with a reprogramming data file (refer to
Click on the V-MAC Utilities bar (located above
“PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA ENTRY
V-MAC Programming) to save customer data and
FORM” on page 134).
view the available programming options (refer to
“UTILITIES BAR” on page 130).

Page 129
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Click on Flash V-MAC Software (Auto Detect) to Click on Save V-MAC Customer Data
let the system detect the V-MAC level and type (AutoDetect) to let the system detect the V-MAC
required for the attached vehicle and to program level and type required for the attached vehicle
the VECU or EECU (as appropriate) with a and to save customer data for the VECU or
product software file (refer to “FLASH V-MAC III EECU (as appropriate). Refer to “SAVE
SOFTWARE ENTRY FORM” on page 133). CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 133.

Click on Flash V-MAC III VECU Software to Click on Save V-MAC III VECU Customer Data
program the VECU with a product software file to save customer data for the VECU (refer to
(refer to “FLASH V-MAC III SOFTWARE ENTRY “SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on
FORM” on page 133). page 133).
Click on Save V-MAC III EECU Customer Data
Click on Flash V-MAC III EECU Software to
to save customer data for the EECU (refer to
program the EECU with a product software file
“SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on
(refer to “FLASH V-MAC III SOFTWARE ENTRY
page 133).
FORM” on page 133).
Click on Save V-MAC II Customer Data to save
Click on Flash V-MAC II Software to program the customer data for the ECU (refer to “SAVE
ECU with a product software file (refer to “FLASH CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 133).
V-MAC III SOFTWARE ENTRY FORM” on page
133). Click on Save V-MAC I Customer Data to save
customer data for the ECU (refer to “SAVE
Click on Flash V.I.P.™ Software to program the CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 133).
Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) with a
product software file (refer to “FLASH V.I.P.™ Click on V-MAC Preferences to customize the
SOFTWARE ENTRY FORM” on page 134). configuration settings (refer to “PREFERENCES
ENTRY FORM” on page 130).
UTILITIES BAR
86
PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM
87

Figure 86 — V-MAC Utilities Bar

Figure 87 — Preferences Entry Form
Click on the V-MAC Utilities bar located above
the V-MAC Programming Bar to access the The Preferences entry form consists of three
V-MAC Utilities screen. screens: Common, Service Software and V-MAC
Dealer Programming and is used to configure the
PC for operation with DEALER PROGRAMMING.
Out of these three screens, the Common entry
form and Dealer Programming entry form are
primarily used.

Page 130
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
To access the Preferences entry form, click on 89

Utilities from the toolbar and then select V-MAC

Preferences from the drop-down list.
88

Figure 89 — Preferences (Dealer Programming) Entry

Form

Figure 88 — Preferences (Common) Entry Form With the Dealer Programming entry form, you can
choose the directory location to save downloaded
The Common entry form is used to specify the files.
communications port to be employed.

Click on the Common tab.

It is recommended that all files be downloaded to
To modify the RP1210A-compliant adapter type and programmed from the computer hard drive.
selection, do the following: Doing this removes the floppy disk drive as a
potential source of downloading and
a. Click on the RP1210A Device Name programming failure. Additionally, programming is
radio button. generally faster and more reliable when
b. Click on the Device Name drop-down performed from the computer hard drive.
arrow and select the adapter desired. Verification files should also be saved to the hard
drive for subsequent upload to V-MAC Online.
c. Click on the Port drop-down arrow and
select the com port desired.
d. Click on the Protocol drop-down arrow Directory settings can be configured for the
and select the protocol type desired following files:
(protocol 1708 is recommended). — Software Files
e. Click on the Apply button to make the — Reprogramming Files (ECU
change. reprogramming data and product
f. Click on the OK button to save software files)
changes. — Saved Customer Files (ECU customer
data files)
— Verification Files (ECU verification files)
Do not use the Mack default setting.
Click on the OK button to save the current
settings as the default. Or, if you want to select
another directory location, click on the Browse
button for each file type. The Select Directory
window will appear.

Page 131
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
90 92

Figure 90 — Select Directory Window

Highlight the folder where you want to save the

files. The example above uses “class 8 files.” The Figure 92 — Dealer Programming Entry Form (Advanced
Button)
status field will show c:\class 8 files as selected.
Click on the Select button to accept the
The Advanced VIP Flash Speed window will
configuration and exit the window.
appear.
93
You may also create a new sub-directory folder to
save the files. In the New Sub-Directory field,
type in the name for the new folder and click on
the Select button.

The Mack Configuration Manager dialog window

will appear, asking if you want to create the new Figure 93 — Advanced VIP Flash Speed Window
sub-directory folder. Click on the Yes button to
accept or click on the No button to decline. Click on the Speed [Baud Rate] drop-down
91
arrow and select a speed of “Slow,” “Medium” or
“Fast.” After you have made your selection, click
on the OK button to accept the changes and
close the window

For V-MAC Programming, 9600 baud rate is

used.

In the Dealer Programming entry form, program

Figure 91 — Mack Configuration Manager Dialog error and debugging information logging can be
Window customized using the Enable Logging,
Application Log Level and Logfile Name fields.
For V.I.P.™ programming, the “flash,” or These functions are used primarily by internal
programming, baud rate may be adjusted. Click Mack personnel.
on the Advanced button on the Dealer
Programming entry form as illustrated in
Figure 92.

Page 132
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM FLASH V-MAC III SOFTWARE ENTRY FORM

Saving customer data must be done prior to Prior to flashing the product software file, please
programming an ECU with the product software save customer data. If you do not save customer
file. If you do not save customer data, odometer data, odometer readings may be lost (please
readings may be lost. refer to “SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY
FORM” on page 133 for more information).
94

95

Figure 94 — Save Customer Data Entry Form

Figure 95 — Flash V-MAC III Software Entry Form
You can save customer data for the vehicle and/or
engine ECU. The saved data can be programmed 1. In the Select Vehicle Software File or Select
back into the ECU during data file Engine Software File field, click on the
reprogramming. Browse button and select the appropriate
product software file.
Click on the Browse button and select the The ECU software version and serial
directory in which the customer data file will be number will be displayed.
saved.
2. If the ECU serial number and software
Click on the Save button to start saving the version are correct, connect computer to
customer data file. vehicle using the datalink adapter and click
on the Program button to begin
Click on the Close button to abort programming. programming.
Once programming has begun, do not
interrupt the process.

It will take up to 30 minutes to program the VECU,

and up to 45 minutes to program the EECU.

3. Cycle the ignition when prompted.

Click on the Close button to exit.

Page 133
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
FLASH V.I.P.™ SOFTWARE ENTRY FORM PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM DATA ENTRY FORM
96 97

Figure 96 — Flash V.I.P.™ Software Entry Form Figure 97 — Program V-MAC III OEM Data Entry Form

1. In the VIP Software File field, click on the

Browse button and select the appropriate
product software file.
If product software programming is required, it
The V.I.P.™ software version number will be
must be done before data file programming.
displayed.
1. In the Select Reprogramming File field, click
on the Browse button and select the
appropriate reprogramming data file.
The VIP Flash Speed field will display the current
speed of the VIP. If you want to select a different 2. In the Select Saved Customer Data File
speed, please refer to “PREFERENCES ENTRY Directory field, click on the Browse button
FORM” on page 130. and select the directory for the customer
data file.
2. If the V.I.P.™ software version number is 3. In the Select Verification File Directory field,
correct, click on the Program button to begin click on the Browse button and select the
programming. directory where the verification file will be
Once programming has begun, do not saved.
interrupt the process.
4. In the Select Reason for Reprogramming
field, click on the drop-down arrow and
select the appropriate reason for
programming.
It will take about 30 minutes to program the V.I.P.™
앫 Choose 1. Validate Data Currently in
3. A pop-up screen will appear after Module when verifying that the data in
downloading is complete. It will prompt the the ECU is identical to data on the
user to cycle the key switch and click the database.
OK button to complete the process.
Click on the Close button to exit.
For programming Type 1 (Verifying/
reprogramming ECU data file), DEALER
PROGRAMMING will determine if the data on the
V.I.P.™ does not require data file programming. floppy disk matches the data in the ECU.

Page 134
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
앫 Choose 2. Replacement of a Module
when replacing or upgrading an ECU.
앫 Choose 3. Erase both Vehicle and For the Save Options function to work, customer
Customer Passwords when erasing data for the VECU must be saved prior to flashing
customer passwords. the VECU when programming the product
앫 Choose 4. Enable/Disable a Feature software file or before programming the
when upgrading the data file after using reprogramming data file.
F3 Update Options on the database.
Make your selections and then click on the
앫 Choose 5. Horsepower Change when OK button to save changes or click on the
updating the data file after a Cancel button to exit if you do not want to
horsepower change. make changes.
앫 Choose 6. Program after a CDS/ 5. Click on the Program button to start
Extension Change when updating programming.
CDS/Extension data.
앫 Choose 7. Program after V-MAC V-MAC Online Screen Summaries
Software Upgrade when
reprogramming after a product software The following section is an introduction to the
upgrade. V-MAC Online screens available through
MACKnet (accessed via the MACK Extranet).
This section is meant to familiarize you with the
various V-MAC Online screens. For detailed
Not all these choices may be available. information on how to use V-MAC Online, please
refer to “USING V-MAC ONLINE AND DEALER
The Program V-MAC III OEM Datafile entry PROGRAMMING” on page 144.
form also allows the option to save specific
units of customer data (for the VECU only). MACKnet LOG ON SCREEN
Click on the Save Options button. The Save
99
Options screen will appear.
98

Figure 98 — Save Options Screen (VECU Only)

As the Mack default setting, all the items

listed will be selected automatically.
Deselect those items you do not wish to
save for the VECU.

Do not deselect the ODOMETER data or mileage Figure 99 — MACKnet Log On Screen
may be lost.

Page 135
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
The MACKnet Log On screen allows you to enter 4. Click on Verification Upload to enter the
the MACK database and use the V-MAC Online Verification Upload entry form (refer to
software. “VERIFICATION UPLOAD ENTRY FORM”
on page 143).
1. Enter your user identification information in
the User ID field.
MACK TRUCKS HOST MENU
2. Enter your password in the Password field.
101
If you want the PC you are using to
remember your user ID, click on the Save
My ID check box. You will still be required to
enter your password.
3. Click on the Log On button to enter the
V-MAC Online Main Menu.

V-MAC ONLINE MAIN SCREEN

100

Figure 101 — Mack Trucks Host Menu

The Mack Trucks Host menu, accessed from the

Vehicle Information screen, contains the
Electronically Controlled Vehicles Application
menu where you can view and modify vehicle and
engine information for class-8 vehicles.

Select the F1 key to access the Administrative/

Customer Information by GSO/CHASSIS or VIN
entry form. This screen displays vehicle
Figure 100 — V-MAC Online Main Menu information (refer to “F1 — ADMINISTRATIVE/
CUSTOMER INFORMATION BY GSO/CHASSIS
The V-MAC Online Menu provides four options to OR VIN ENTRY FORM” on page 137).
choose from for class-8 vehicles: Vehicle
Information, Product Software Download, Datafile Select the F3 key to access the Update Options
Download and Verification Upload. form (refer to “F3 — UPDATE OPTIONS ENTRY
1. Click on Vehicle Information (for class FORM” on page 137).
6-7-8) to enter the MACK Trucks Host Menu
(refer to “MACK TRUCKS HOST MENU” on Select the F5 key to access the Update
page 136). Calibration Codes entry form (refer to “F5 —
UPDATE CALIBRATION CODES ENTRY FORM”
2. Click on Product Software Download to on page 138).
enter the Product Software Download entry
form (refer to “SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD Select the F9 key to access the Engine ECU Part
ENTRY FORM” on page 142). Number Change entry form (refer to “F9 — EECU
3. Click on Datafile Download to enter the PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY FORM” on
Datafile Download entry form (refer to page 140).
“DATAFILE DOWNLOAD ENTRY FORM” on
page 142). Select the F11 key to access the Vehicle ECU
Part Number Change entry form (refer to “F11 —
VECU PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY FORM”
on page 140).

Page 136
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Select the F19 key to access the Add VIN/GSO/ F3 — UPDATE OPTIONS ENTRY FORM
Chassis entry form (refer to “F19 — ADD VIN/ 103
GSO/CHASSIS ENTRY FORM” on page 141).

Select the F20 key to access the Install Engine

entry form (refer to “F20 — INSTALL ENGINE
ENTRY FORM” on page 141).

F1 — ADMINISTRATIVE/CUSTOMER
INFORMATION BY GSO/CHASSIS OR VIN
ENTRY FORM
102

Figure 103 — F3 Entry Form

The F3 entry form displays what options have

been enabled and also allows you to enable or
disable options for the particular chassis. Items
with an “N” next to them indicate that option is
disabled. Items with a “Y” next to them indicate
that option is enabled. To enable or disable
options, follow the steps below:
1. To enable an option, type over the “N” with a
Figure 102 — F1 Entry Form “Y” and hit the Enter key.
2. To disable an option, type over the “Y” with
The F1 entry form permits you to view customer
an “N” and hit the Enter key.
information and general vehicle information by
GSO/Chassis or VIN. To view the information, 3. Hit the F6 key to return to the Mack Trucks
type in the GSO/Chassis number or VIN and hit Host menu or hit the F10 key to exit the
the Enter key. Hit the F6 key to return to the screen. After you have enabled or disabled
MACK HOST menu or hit the F10 key to exit the the options wanted, you must now program
screen. the chassis for these changes to take effect.
Please refer to Dealer Programming
“PRODUCT SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING
(PSP)” on page 128.

Page 137
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
F5 — UPDATE CALIBRATION CODES ENTRY To change an Electronic Unit Pump (EUP) code,
FORM use the following steps:
104
1. In the Update Indicator column, enter “Y”
over the “N” along side of the cylinder
number of the EUP you want to change.
2. In the EUP Serial Number column, enter the
new EUP serial number over the current
number displayed.
3. In the Calibration Code column, enter the
new Calibration Code number over the
current number displayed.
4. In the Change Category Code column, enter
the appropriate Code Letter that best
describes the reason for the change.
(Change Category Codes are listed at the
bottom of the F5 screen.)
Figure 104 — F5 Entry Form 5. Hit the F6 key to return to the Mack Trucks
Host menu screen or hit the F10 key to exit
The F5 entry form permits you to view and update the screen when you have finished making
calibration codes. Type in the GSO/CHASSIS your changes.
serial numbers or type in the VIN and press the
Enter key. The entry form will then display the The following table contains the editing functions
engine model, engine serial and engine software associated with the F5 — Update Calibration
part numbers. Codes entry form:

If the GSO/CHASSIS serial numbers or VIN is not

found in the database, a message near the lower
left-hand side of the screen will be displayed,
indicating that the GSO/CHASSIS or VIN was not
found.

Page 138
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Column Item Function
Update Indicator N or Y must be displayed or an error message will be
displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Cylinder Number This column will display cylinders 1 through 6.
EUP Serial Number 앫 If this column is blank, an error message will be
displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
앫 Second position of the existing EUP serial number
contains either a “B” (standard EUP) or an “M”
(CCRS). First position contains a “P” or “C”
(remanufactured EUP).
앫 Second position of the new EUP serial number
(whether it contains a B or an M) must be the same for
the other five existing EUP serial numbers. For
example, if the new EUP serial number for cylinder
number 1 is 0B2M15K, then the rest of the EUP serial
numbers must also contain the B in the second
position.
앫 If the EUP is remanufactured, then a P will be in the
first position and a B in the second position for the
other EUPs.
앫 Step 7 and earlier engines must have a B in the
second position of all their EUP serial numbers or an
error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand
corner of the screen.
앫 Step 8 ASET™ AI engines must have an M in the
second position of all their EUP serial numbers or an
error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand
corner of the screen. ASET™ AC engines must have
an X in the second position or Y in the first position of
all their EUP serial numbers or an error message will
display.
앫 Engines with a “C” (remanufactured CCRS) in the first
position will display an “M” in other EUPs.
앫 If the EUP serial number is changed, the calibration
code must also be changed or an error message will
be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the
screen.
Calibration Code 앫 If this column is blank, an error message will be
displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
앫 If the calibration code is changed, the EUP serial
number must also be changed or an error message will
be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the
screen.
Change Category Code If the EUP serial number and calibration code are changed, a
change category code must be entered or an error message
will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.

Page 139
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
F9 — EECU PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY F11 — VECU PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY
FORM FORM
105 106

Figure 105 — F9 Entry Form Figure 106 — F11 Entry Form

The F9 entry form allows you to change the The F11 entry form allows you to change the
Engine ECU hardware and purchase part Vehicle ECU part number for V-MAC III modules
numbers for a V-MAC or FIC module. only. To change the information, enter the GSO/
CHASSIS serial numbers or VIN for the chassis
To change the information, enter the GSO/ you are selecting and use the following steps:
CHASSIS serial numbers or VIN for the chassis
you are selecting and perform the following steps: 1. In the VECU1 H/W Part field, type in the
V-MAC ECU hardware part number and hit
1. In the ECU1 H/W Part field, type in the the Enter key.
V-MAC ECU hardware part number and hit
the Enter key. 2. In the Purchased Part field, type in the
Purchased part number and hit the Enter
2. In the ECU2 H/W Part field, type in the FIC key. The software version number will
module part number and hit the Enter key. display in the Software Version field.
3. In the Purchased Part field, type in the 3. Hit the F6 key to return to the Mack Trucks
Purchased part number and hit the Enter Host menu screen or hit the F10 key to exit
key. The software version number will the entry form.
display in the Software Version field.
4. Hit the F6 key to return to the Mack Trucks
Host menu screen or hit the F10 key to exit
the entry form.

Page 140
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
F19 — ADD VIN/GSO/CHASSIS ENTRY FORM F20 — INSTALL ENGINE ENTRY FORM
107 108

Figure 107 — F19 Entry Form Figure 108 — F20 Entry Form

The F19 entry form allows you to add the VIN, The F20 entry form allows you to assign an
GSO and Chassis. A record is created for a non- available electronic engine to a particular VIN. To
electronic VIN that has been converted to an assign an engine, use the following steps. After
electronic vehicle. To add the information, use the the engine is assigned, selection of the data file
following steps: must be done for programming.
1. Enter the VIN in the VIN field. 1. In the VIN field, type in the VIN of the
chassis you want to have an engine
2. Enter the GSO serial number in the GSO
assignment.
field.
2. In the Engine Serial field, type in the Engine
3. Enter the CHASSIS serial number in the
Serial number you want assigned to the
Chassis field.
selected chassis. You must program the
4. Enter the Chassis Model Number in the chassis for the change to take place (please
Chassis Model field. refer to “USING V-MAC ONLINE AND
DEALER PROGRAMMING” on page 144).
5. Hit the Enter key when you are finished
making your entries. 3. Hit the Enter key when you are finished
making your entries.
6. Hit the F6 key to return to the Mack Trucks
Host menu screen or hit the F10 key to exit 4. Hit the F6 key to return to the Mack Trucks
the entry form. Host menu screen or hit the F10 key to exit
the entry form.

Page 141
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD ENTRY FORM 4. Click on the Save button. The Save As
109 window will appear to save the product
software file. Download the file to your
computer hard drive.
110

Figure 109 — Software Entry Form

The Software entry form permits you to download Figure 110 — Software Save As Window
a product software file from the MACK database
via V-MAC Online. DATAFILE DOWNLOAD ENTRY FORM
1. Select the system type. Click on the V-MAC 111

button for class 8 vehicles. Or, click on the

VIP radio button if you need to download a
product software file for the Vehicle
Information Profiler™ (V.I.P.™).

The ECU Serial # field entry does not apply to the

V.I.P.™

2. After you have selected the desired system

type, enter the software version number in
the Software Version # field, and enter the
ECU serial number in the ECU Serial # field.

Figure 111 — Datafile Download Entry Form

If you do not know the ECU Serial #, you can find
this information in the class 6-7-8 Vehicle The Datafile Download entry form permits you to
Information/F1 entry form (see Figure 102). download a reprogramming datafile from the
MACK database via V-MAC Online.
3. If you need to clear your selections, click on 1. Enter the GSO and Chassis Serial number
the Clear button. Or, if you are ready to in the GSO and Chassis Serial # fields. Or,
download the file, click on the Submit enter the vehicle identification number in the
button. The File Download dialog box will VIN field.
appear, asking you to save the file. 2. Select the ECU/Module type and click on the
appropriate V-MAC ECU radio button.

Page 142
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
3. If you need to clear your selections, click on 1. Enter the verification file name in the
the Clear button. Or, if you are ready to numbered field entries. Or, simply click on
download the file, click on the Submit the Browse button to select the desired
button. The File Download dialog box will verification file. If you click on the Browse
appear, asking you to save the file. button, a Choose File window will appear.
114
4. Click on the Save button. The Save As
window will appear to save and download
the reprogramming data file. Download the
file to your computer hard drive.
112

Figure 114 — Choose File Window

2. Click on the Look In drop-down arrow and

select the location of the file on the PC hard
drive.
3. Click on the verification file and click on the
Open button. The selected file will
automatically appear in the verification file
field and will show the location where the file
will be saved.
Figure 112 — Datafile Save As Window 4. Click on the Submit button to begin
uploading the file to the MACK database. Or,
if you need to remove entries from the fields,
VERIFICATION UPLOAD ENTRY FORM
click on the Clear button.
113

If the verification upload was successful, you will

receive an “All Verification Successful” message.
115

Figure 113 — Verification Upload Entry Form Figure 115 — All Verification Successful Dialog Window

The Verification Upload entry form allows you to In the USING V-MAC ONLINE AND DEALER
upload a verification file to the MACK database PROGRAMMING section (please refer to “USING
via V-MAC Online. You can enter up to V-MAC ONLINE AND DEALER
10 verification files at one time. PROGRAMMING” on page 144), you will learn
how to use V-MAC Online in conjunction with
Dealer Programming.

Page 143
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
USING V-MAC ONLINE AND 2. The second phase is saving customer data.
DEALER PROGRAMMING Saving a customer data file is done prior to
programming the ECU using V-MAC Dealer
Remember when using V-MAC Online that Dealer Programming software.
Programming software consists of two
programming portions: product software and data 3. The third phase is programming.
file programming. As you may recall, both kinds of Programming (flashing) is loading a product
programming have different file types. Let us software file that was downloaded from the
quickly review once more. MACK database into the ECU using V-MAC
Dealer Programming software.
The product software file-programming portion of
Dealer Programming uses two different types of
files:
Data File Programming
앫 A customer data file is created whenever Reprogramming a data file is similar to product
you save customer parameters. This should software programming, but involves three distinct
be done prior to product software or data file phases:
programming. 1. The first phase is downloading.
앫 A product software file is downloaded from Downloading is receiving a data file from the
the MACK database via V-MAC Online and MACK database and transferring the file to
reprograms (flashes) the ECU software or your PC using V-MAC Online.
V.I.P.™ software.
2. The second phase is programming.
The data file-programming portion of Dealer Programming is loading a data file that was
Programming uses three different types of files: downloaded from the MACK database into
the ECU using V-MAC Dealer Programming
앫 A customer data file is created whenever software.
you save customer parameters. This should
be done prior to product software or data file 3. The third phase is uploading.
programming. Uploading is transferring a verification data
앫 A reprogramming (reference) data file is file (created during programming with
downloaded from the MACK database via V-MAC Dealer Programming software) from
V-MAC Online and reprograms the ECU your PC to the MACK database using
data. V-MAC Online.
앫 A verification file is created after
To sum it up
programming is completed. You then upload
the file to the MACK database via V-MAC 앫 Downloading is the way to receive
Online. information from the MACK database using
V-MAC Online.
REVIEW DEALER 앫 Programming is the way to put the
information into the vehicle’s ECUs using
PROGRAMMING PHASES Dealer Programming software.
Both product software programming and data file 앫 Uploading is the way to send the
programming involve phases. information back to the MACK database
using V-MAC Online.
Product Software Programming
Reprogramming a product software file involves
three distinct phases.
1. The first phase is downloading.
Downloading is receiving a product software
file from the MACK database and
transferring the file to your PC using V-MAC
Online.

Page 144
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
PUTTING IT TOGETHER Step 3 — Save Customer Data (for
In this section, you will download and upload files VECU)
using V-MAC Online and flash and program using
Hook up to the vehicle and launch V-MAC Dealer
Dealer Programming. The following example will
Programming software. Access the Save VECU
use a file for a vehicle ECU. Your objective will be
Customer Data screen.
to upgrade the VECU to a higher level of 116
software. For generic, basic programming steps,
please refer to “Overview of Basic Programming
Steps” on page 149.

Step 1 — Configure PC
Ensure that the PC has been configured properly.
Please refer to “PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM”
on page 130 for instruction.

It is recommended that all files be downloaded to

and programmed from the computer hard drive.
Doing this removes the floppy disk drive as a
potential source of downloading and
Figure 116 — Save VECU Customer Data Entry Form
programming failure. Additionally, programming is
generally faster and more reliable when
Use the location on your computer’s hard drive
performed from the computer hard drive.
and click on the Save button to save the VECU
Verification files should also be saved to the hard
customer data (the file extension will be .dtv for
drive for subsequent upload to V-MAC Online.
V-MAC III VECU). Always save customer data
prior to programming with a product software file
or reprogramming a datafile unless instructed
Step 2 — Find Vehicle Information otherwise.
(for VECU)
Before you can download a file from the MACK Step 4 — Download Software File
database using V-MAC Online, you will need to (for VECU)
record the following information:
Enter the V-MAC Online Main Menu via
앫 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) MACKnet. Refer to “MACKnet LOG ON
앫 VECU Serial Number SCREEN” on page 135 for instructions on how to
enter the V-MAC Online Main Menu.
The above two items can be found via the
V-MAC Online class 6-7-8 Vehicle Information/F1
Once you have entered the V-MAC Online Main
entry form.
Menu, click on Software Download to enter the
앫 VECU Software Version Number (in this Software Download entry form.
case, you will need to know the next higher
level of software to upgrade)

Page 145
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
When you have entered the Datafile Download
117

entry form, enter the VIN or GSO/CHASSIS serial

number and click on the V-MAC III Vehicle radio
button. Click on the Submit button to download
the datafile. When you are finished saving the file,
ensure that the reprogramming datafile (the file
extension will be .rfv for V-MAC III VECU) was
saved to the designated location on the computer
hard drive.

Step 6 — Program (Flash) VECU

If you have not saved customer data at this point,

please do so now. Refer to Step 3.
Figure 117 — Software Download Entry Form

When you have entered the Software Download Launch V-MAC Dealer Programming software
entry form, type in the product software number and enter the Flash III VECU screen.
119
that you are using to make the upgrade and the
vehicle ECU serial number you recorded earlier.
Select the vehicle system type (V-MAC) and then
click on the Submit button. When you are
finished saving the file, ensure that the software
file was saved to the designated location (you can
identify the VECU software file by its file
extension — ″.sfv).

Step 5 — Download Datafile (for

VECU)
While you are still in V-MAC Online, click on
Datafile Download to enter the Datafile
Download entry form.
118
Figure 119 — Flash V-MAC III VECU Software Entry Form

Click on the Browse button to select the product

software file. Click on the Program button to
program (flash) the vehicle ECU. The flashing
sequence will take up to 40 minutes. When the
flashing session is over, wait for the “cycle the
power” message and follow as instructed. When
the flashing sequence is over and the software
automatically transports you to the Dealer
Programming Main Menu, check that the product
software file (.sfv) is gone from the designated
location on your PC hard drive.

Figure 118 — Datafile Download Entry Form

Page 146
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Step 7 — Program VECU Step 8 — Upload Verification File
While you are still in V-MAC Dealer Programming Re-enter V-MAC Online via MACKnet, and click
software, enter the Program III VECU OEM Data on Verification Upload. The Verification Upload
screen. After the fields fill with data, click on the entry form will appear.
RFV Browse button to open the reprogramming 121

data file (.rfv). Click on the DTV Browse button to

save the customer datafile (.dtv). Click on the
VEV Browse button to select the verification file.
120

Figure 121 — Verification Upload Entry Form

Click on the Browse button to open and attach

Figure 120 — Program V-MAC III VECU OEM Data Entry
the verification file. Click on the Submit button to
Form upload the verification file to the MACK database.
When the upload is complete, check that the
Click on the Select Reason for Reprogramming verification file is gone from the designated
drop-down arrow and choose “Program after location on your PC hard drive.
Software Upgrade.” If desired, click on the Save
Options button to select all, some or none of the
available customer data sections.

If you do not save customer data, odometer

readings may be lost.

For more information on the Save Options

function, refer to the “PROGRAM V-MAC III OEM
DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 134.

Click on the Program button. When the

reprogramming process is complete (up to
35 minutes), check that the reprogramming data
file has been replaced with a verification file (.vev)
in the designated location on your PC hard drive.

Page 147
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Step 9 — View MACK Host Vehicle Click on the F1 key to invoke the ADMIN/CUST
BY GSO/CHAS/VIN screen.
Information Screen 123

From the V-MAC Online Main Menu, click on

Vehicle Information under the Class 6, 7 and 8
Vehicle heading. The Mack Trucks Host Menu
screen will appear.
122

Figure 123 — F1 Entry Form

Enter the Chassis Model and Chassis Serial

number or the VIN and hit the Enter key. Check
that the verification file for the vehicle ECU was
Figure 122 — Mack Trucks Host Menu
received. If the upload was successful, a “Y” for
yes will appear next to “VECU Verified.”

Page 148
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
Overview of Basic Programming Steps
1. Determine which type of programming is needed (refer to the “SUMMARY OF PROGRAMMING
TYPES” table on page 149).
2. Identify and photocopy the appropriate worksheet (refer to the “WORKSHEET IDENTIFICATION”
table on page 150).
3. Perform each of the procedures for the specific programming type. Most worksheet items include
references for detailed procedures that more fully explain how to complete a programming step.
These “Detailed Programming Instructions” should only be used in conjunction with an appropriate
worksheet (refer to “Detailed Programming Instructions” on page 152).

If the vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) display, the
V.I.P.™ may beep during programming and display the following message: “A loss of
communication on the J1587”. Disregard the message and acknowledge it only
when the programming is complete to prevent the V.I.P.™ from beeping again.

STEP 1 — DETERMINING THE PROGRAMMING TYPE

Refer to the following chart to determine the type of programming.

SUMMARY OF PROGRAMMING TYPES

Type Description of Programming Action File(s) to Download
T1 Verifying/reprogramming ECU data file(s) Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T2 Replacing defective ECUs with the same P/N Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T3 Erasing customer passwords Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T4 Programming after F3 update Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T5 Programming after HP change EECU reprogramming data file — new version
T6 Programming with new data file(s) Reprogramming data file(s) — new version
T7 Reprogramming ECU software file(s) Product software file(s) — same version
Reprogramming V.I.P.™ software file Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
(does not apply to V.I.P.™)
T8 Upgrading ECU software file(s) Product software file(s) — new version
Reprogramming data file(s) — new version
T9 Reprogramming CDS-EXT file(s) Reprogramming data file(s) — new version

The software will automatically run a comparison check for Type 1 and 4 through 6.
However, in the case of VECU CDS-EXT file, the comparison checking may not be
accurate; therefore, don't rely on data comparison for the VECU.

Page 149
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
STEP 2 — IDENTIFYING THE APPROPRIATE WORKSHEET
Locate the worksheet that corresponds to the programming type.

WORKSHEET IDENTIFICATION TABLE

* — Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and V-MAC II modules, too.

Reason for
Type Description Worksheet Location Reprogramming
T1 Verifying/reprogramming Refer to TYPE 1 — VECU in T1
VECU data file Programming Worksheets
T1 Verifying/reprogramming Refer to TYPE 1 — EECU in T1
EECU* data file Programming Worksheets
T1 Verifying/reprogramming Refer to TYPE 1 — BOTH T1
both data files ECUs in Programming
Worksheets
T2 Replacing defective VECU Refer to TYPE 2 — VECU in T2
with the same P/N Programming Worksheets
T2 Replacing defective EECU* Refer to TYPE 2 — EECU in T2
with the same P/N Programming Worksheets
T2 Replacing both ECUs with Refer to TYPE 2 — BOTH T2
the same P/N ECUs in Programming
Worksheets
T3 Erasing VECU customer Refer to TYPE 3 — VECU in T3
passwords Programming Worksheets
T3 Erasing EECU* customer Refer to TYPE 3 — EECU in T3
passwords Programming Worksheets
T3 Erasing all customer Refer to TYPE 3 — BOTH T3
passwords ECUs in Programming
Worksheets
T4 Programming after VECU F3 Refer to TYPE 4 — VECU in T4
update Programming Worksheets
T4 Programming after EECU* Refer to TYPE 4 — EECU in T4
F3 update Programming Worksheets
T4 Programming after VECU Refer to TYPE 4 — BOTH T4
and EECU F3 update ECUs in Programming
Worksheets
T5 Programming after HP Refer to TYPE 5 (EECU T5
change ONLY) in Programming
Worksheets
T6 Programming VECU with Refer to TYPE 6 — VECU in T1
new data file Programming Worksheets
T6 Programming EECU* with Refer to TYPE 6 — EECU in T1
new data file Programming Worksheets
T6 Programming both ECUs Refer to TYPE 6 — BOTH T1
with new data files ECUs in Programming
Worksheets
T7 Reprogramming VECU Refer to TYPE 7 — VECU in T7
software file Programming Worksheets
T7 Reprogramming EECU (for Refer to TYPE 7 — EECU in T7
V-MAC II and V-MAC III only) Programming Worksheets
software file
T7 Reprogramming VECU and Refer to TYPE 7 — BOTH T7
EECU software files ECUs in Programming
Worksheets

Page 150
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Reason for
Type Description Worksheet Location Reprogramming
T7 Reprogramming V.I.P™ Refer to TYPE 7 — V.I.P.™ in N/A
software file Programming Worksheets
T8 Upgrading VECU software Refer to TYPE 8 — VECU in T7
file Programming Worksheets
T8 Upgrading EECU (for Refer to TYPE 8 — EECU in T7
V-MAC II and V-MAC III only) Programming Worksheets
software file
T8 Upgrading VECU and EECU Refer to TYPE 8 — BOTH T7
software files ECUs in Programming
Worksheets
T9 Reprogramming CDS-EXT Refer to TYPE 9 — CDS- T9
file EXT in Programming
Worksheets

Worksheets apply to V-MAC II programming also. The V-MAC II ECU should be

considered as the EECU.

STEP 3 — PERFORMING PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

Perform the procedures outlined in the worksheet.

Page 151
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Detailed Programming Instructions
REMOVING FUSES
If EECU customer data cannot be saved, the
Application: Vehicle (mechanical procedure) electronic unit pumps must be recalibrated after
programming is complete.

Before programming, all other control units using RE-ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS
the J1587 line must be disabled. Failure to
disable other control units will result in an inability Application: V-MAC Service Support Software
to complete programming. If programming is
incomplete, the ECU passwords will be out of Path:
phase and the ECU will be unusable. →CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
→(any choice except View/Print or
Systems that may use the J1587 line include (but Program Unit Pump Calibration)
are not limited to): ABS/ATC, Automatic
transmissions, Co-Pilot, V.I.P.™ and Re-enter customer passwords, if applicable.
communication devices. Refer to the CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
1. Determine all systems that use the J1587 section for detailed instructions concerning
line and remove the appropriate fuses (refer customer passwords.
to the wiring diagrams provided with the
vehicle).
2. Record the amperage and location of each After programming, all passwords will return to
fuse that is removed (to allow for proper re- the default (10 blank spaces).
installation once programming is complete).

CLEARING FAULT TABLES PROGRAMMING THE REPROGRAMMING

Application: V-MAC Service Support Software DATA FILE
Application: V-MAC Dealer Programming
Path: Software
→SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Path:
→Fault Codes
→DEALER PROGRAMMING
→Clear Fault Codes
→Program VECU or EECU OEM Data
Clear the VECU and/or EECU fault table(s).
1. Insert the disk with the reprogramming data
Refer to the SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS section for file(s) in the floppy drive.
detailed instructions concerning fault tables. 2. Access DEALER PROGRAMMING.
3. Click on the V-MAC Programming tab.
SAVING CUSTOMER DATA
4. Click on the appropriate selection (Program
Application: V-MAC Dealer Programming V-MAC III VECU OEM Data or Program
Software V-MAC III EECU OEM Data or Program
V-MAC II OEM Data or Program V-MAC I
Path: OEM Data or Program ITC OEM Data).
→DEALER PROGRAMMING 5. Select the vehicle/engine reprogramming
→Utilities file.

→Save Customer Data

Page 152
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
6. Select the customer data file (customer data
must be saved prior to programming the
product software or reprogramming the data
file). When reflashing an EECU from Step 4 to Step 5,
turn off the exhaust brake option in the Engine
7. Select the directory for the verification data ECU customer parameter using CUSTOMER
file. DATA PROGRAMMING after OEM.
8. Select the reason for reprogramming.
앫 Choose 1. Validate Data Currently in
CHANGING THE ECU PART NUMBER
Module when verifying that the data in
the ECU is identical to data on the Application: Mack Trucks Host menu via V-MAC
database. Online

Path:
→Host
For programming Type 1 (Verifying/
reprogramming ECU data file), the V-MAC III →Electronically Controlled Vehicles
system will determine if the data on the hard drive →F9 EECU Part Number Change or F11
matches the data in the ECU. VECU Part Number Change

앫 Choose 2. Replacement of a Module 1. Enter the VIN or GSO and serial number.
when replacing or upgrading an ECU.
2. Enter the hardware part number in the H/W
앫 Choose 3. Erase both Vehicle and Part field and press Enter.
Customer Passwords when erasing The available software part numbers will
customer passwords. appear.
앫 Choose 4. Enable/Disable a Feature 3. Use the TAB key to move to the desired
when upgrading the data file after using software part number, type x and press
F3 Update Options on the database. Enter.
앫 Choose 5. Horsepower Change when
updating the data file after a USING THE F3 UPDATE OPTIONS SCREEN
horsepower change.
Application: Mack Trucks Host menu via V-MAC
앫 Choose 6. Program after a CDS/ Online
Extension Change when updating
CDS/Extension data. Path:
앫 Choose 7. Program after V-MAC →Host
Software Upgrade when
reprogramming after a product software →Electronically Controlled Vehicles
upgrade. →F3 Update Options
9. Click on the Save Options button. The Save
Options screen will appear. The MACK The F3 Update Options screen allows the user to
default setting has all the items selected. modify the data file to reflect a change (enabling
Deselect what customer data options you do or disabling a feature or sensor).
not want to save, if any, and click on the OK
button.

The ECU reprogramming data file must be

downloaded (and the ECU must be
Do not deselect the ODOMETER data or mileage reprogrammed) if changes are made to the
may be lost. feature options.

10. Click on the Program button.

Page 153
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
3. Click on the radio button next to “Vehicle” for
a VECU file or next to “Engine” for an EECU
file for V-MAC III system type.
Depending on the truck configuration, some
options may not be available. 4. Click on the Submit button.
The File Download dialog box will appear,
asking you to save the file. Click on the Save
button.
5. The Save As dialog box will appear. Select
The VECU reprogramming data file must be
the file and click the Save button and save
downloaded (and the VECU must be
the file to your PC hard drive.
reprogrammed) if changes are made to sensor
information stored in the VECU.
UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE
Application: V-MAC Online

Path:
The EECU reprogramming data file must be
downloaded (and the EECU must be →Verification
reprogrammed) if changes are made to sensor
1. Connect to V-MAC Online and click on
information stored in the EECU.
Verification Upload.
2. Click on the Browse button and select the
DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE desired verification data file(s).
FILE 3. Click on the Submit button.
Application: V-MAC Online A message will appear indicating that the file
has been uploaded.
Path:
→Product Software DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE
V.I.P.™ FILE
1. Connect to V-MAC Online and click on
Product Software Download. Application: V-MAC Online
2. Enter the desired software version, enter the
Path:
ECU serial number and click on the V-MAC
radio button. →Product Software
3. Click on the Submit button. 1. Connect to V-MAC Online, start V-MAC and
The File Download dialog box will appear, click on Product Software Download.
asking you to save the file. Click on the Save 2. Click on the VIP radio button.
button.
3. Enter the desired software version (refer to
4. Save the file to your PC hard drive. the V-MAC Configuration charts).
4. Click on the Submit button.
DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING
The File Download dialog box will appear,
DATA FILE
asking to save the file. Click on the Save
Application: V-MAC Online button and save the file to your PC hard
drive.
Path:
→Datafile
1. Connect to V-MAC Online and click on
Datafile Download.
2. Enter the VIN or GSO and Chassis number.

Page 154
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
RECALIBRATING THE EUPS 1. Access DEALER PROGRAMMING.
Application: V-MAC Service Support Software 2. Click on the V-MAC Programming tab.
3. Click on the appropriate selection (Flash
Path:
V-MAC Software [AutoDetect] or Flash
→CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING V-MAC III VECU Software or Flash
V-MAC III EECU Software or Flash
→Program Unit Pump Calibration
V-MAC II Software or Flash V.I.P.™
Software).
Refer to the CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
section for detailed instructions concerning EUP 4. Select the vehicle/engine/V.I.P.™
calibration. reprogramming file (product software file)
and click on the Browse button.
FLASHING THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE FILE The ECU or V.I.P.™ software version and
serial number (serial number does not apply
Application: V-MAC Dealer Programming to V.I.P.™) will be displayed.
Software
5. If the ECU or V.I.P.™ software version and
Path: serial number (serial number does not apply
to V.I.P.™) is correct, click on the Program
→DEALER PROGRAMMING button.
→Flash VECU or EECU Software or Once programming has begun, do not
V-MAC II ECU or V.I.P.™ interrupt the process.

Prior to flashing the product software file, please It will take about 35 minutes to program the
save customer data unless instructed otherwise VECU, 45 minutes to program the EECU and
(refer to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 30 minutes to program V.I.P.™
152 for information).
6. Cycle the ignition when prompted.

Page 155
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Programming Worksheets TYPE 1 — EECU

TYPE 1 — VECU Use this worksheet when verifying the current

data file or reprogramming the EECU with the
Use this worksheet when verifying the current same data file. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and
data file or reprogramming the VECU with the V-MAC II modules, too.)
same data file.
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 154).
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to “REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 152).
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE- ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on page 152).
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).
on page 154).

Page 156
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 1— BOTH ECUs TYPE 2 — VECU
Use this worksheet when verifying the current Use this worksheet when replacing a defective
data file or reprogramming both ECUs with the VECU with a new VECU that has the same
same data files. purchase P/N.
첸 Download both VECU and EECU 첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
reprogramming data files (refer to file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
“DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
DATA FILE” on page 154). 154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152). “REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer 첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
152).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
첸 Install a new VECU.
152).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
152). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE- 첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
page 152). on page 154).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 157
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 2 — EECU TYPE 2 — BOTH ECUs
Use this worksheet when replacing a defective Use this worksheet when replacing both ECUs
EECU with a new EECU that has the same with new ECUs that have the same purchase
purchase P/N. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and P/Ns.
V-MAC II modules, too.)
첸 Download both VECU and EECU
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data reprogramming data files (refer to
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE “DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page DATA FILE” on page 154).
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to “REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 152).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to 첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152). to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
152).
첸 Install a new EECU.
첸 Install new ECUs.
Program the EECU reprogramming data file (refer
to “PROGRAMMING THE REPROGRAMMING 첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
DATA FILE” on page 152). (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
152).
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
page 152).
152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
on page 154).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to“UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 158
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 3 — VECU TYPE 3 — EECU
Use this worksheet when erasing the VECU Use this worksheet when erasing the EECU
customer passwords. customer passwords. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC
and V-MAC II modules, too.)
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
154). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152). 첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
152). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
page 152). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” 첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
on page 154). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 154).

Page 159
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 3 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 4 — VECU
Use this worksheet when erasing customer Use this worksheet when programming the VECU
passwords for both ECUs. after modifying the data file using F3 Update
Options.
첸 Download both VECU and EECU
reprogramming data files (refer to 첸 Modify the VECU data file using F3 Update
“DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING Options (refer to “USING THE F3 UPDATE
DATA FILE” on page 154). OPTIONS SCREEN” on page 153).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to 첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152). file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer
154).
to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page
152). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
152). “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file 첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
152).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 152).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
152).
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE- page 152).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
page 152).
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
on page 154).
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 160
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 4 — EECU TYPE 4 — BOTH ECUs
Use this worksheet when programming the EECU Use this worksheet when programming both
after modifying the data file using F3 Update ECUs after modifying the data file using F3
Options. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and V-MAC II Update Options.
modules, too.)
첸 Modify both VECU and EECU data files
첸 Modify the EECU data file using F3 Update using F3 Update Options (refer to “USING
Options (refer to “USING THE F3 UPDATE THE F3 UPDATE OPTIONS SCREEN” on
OPTIONS SCREEN” on page 153). page 153).
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data 첸 Download both VECU and EECU
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE reprogramming data files (refer to
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page “DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING
154). DATA FILE” on page 154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152). “REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to 첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152). to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page
152).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152). 첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
152).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
152). (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
152).
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
page 152).
152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
on page 154).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 161
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 5 (EECU ONLY) TYPE 6 — VECU
Use this worksheet when programming the EECU Use this worksheet when programming the VECU
after the data file has been modified to reflect a with a new data file.
horsepower change. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
and V-MAC II modules, too.)
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 154).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
154).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 152).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
152).
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE- page 152).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
page 152).
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer on page 154).
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 154).

Page 162
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 6 — EECU TYPE 6 — BOTH ECUs
Use this worksheet when programming the EECU Use this worksheet when programming both
with a new data file. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and ECUs with new data files.
V-MAC II modules, too.)
첸 Download both VECU and EECU
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data reprogramming data files (refer to
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE “DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page DATA FILE” on page 154).
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to “REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 152).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to 첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152). to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
152).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
152). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
152).
page 152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
on page 154).
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 163
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 7 — VECU TYPE 7 — EECU
Use this worksheet when reprogramming the Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
VECU with the same product software file. EECU with the same product software file.
(Applies to V-MAC II module, too.)
첸 Download the VECU product software file
(refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT 첸 Download the EECU product software file
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 154). (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 154).
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
154). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152). 첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE 첸 Program the EECU product software file
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128). (refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
152). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
page 152). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” 첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
on page 154). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 154).

Page 164
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 7 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 7 — V.I.P.™
Use this worksheet when reprogramming both Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
ECUs with the same product software files. V.I.P.™ with a same product software file.
첸 Download both VECU and EECU product 첸 Download the V.I.P.™ product software file
software files (refer to “DOWNLOADING (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT
THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE FILE” on page SOFTWARE V.I.P.™ FILE” on page 154).
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Download both VECU and EECU “REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
reprogramming data files (refer to
첸 Program the V.I.P.™ product software file
“DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
DATA FILE” on page 154).
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer
to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page
152).
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
152).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Program the EECU product software (refer
to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 165
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 8 — VECU TYPE 8 — EECU
Use this worksheet when reprogramming the Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
VECU with a new product software file. EECU with a new product software file. (Applies
to V-MAC II module, too.)
첸 Change the VECU part number (refer to
“CHANGING THE ECU PART NUMBER” on 첸 Change the EECU part number (refer to
page 153). “CHANGING THE ECU PART NUMBER” on
page 153).
첸 Download the VECU product software file
(refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT 첸 Download the EECU product software file
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 154). (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 154).
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
154). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152). 첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 152).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE 첸 Program the EECU product software file
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128). (refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
152). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152). 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
page 152). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” 첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
on page 154). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 154).

Page 166
 DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
TYPE 8 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 9 — CDS-EXT
Use this worksheet when reprogramming both Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
ECUs with new product software files. VECU after modifying the data file using the F3
Update Options.
첸 Change both VECU and EECU part
numbers (refer to “CHANGING THE ECU 첸 Update the CDS-EXT VECU data file using
PART NUMBER” on page 153). F3 Update Options (refer to “USING THE F3
UPDATE OPTIONS SCREEN” on page
첸 Download both VECU and EECU product
153). If the vehicle is V-MAC II and already
software files (refer to “DOWNLOADING
has an extension file, reflash. If the vehicle is
THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE FILE” on page
a V-MAC III, refer to Type 4 VECU. For
154).
V-MAC II, update the ECU part number. For
첸 Download both VECU and EECU V-MAC III, update the CDS part number.
reprogramming data files (“DOWNLOADING
THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on
page 154).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 152).
첸 Clear the VECU and EECU fault tables (refer
to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page
152).
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
152).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Program the EECU product software (refer
to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 128).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
152).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 152).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 152).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 154).

Page 167
 NOTES

Page 168
GLOSSARY

GLOSSARY

Page 169
 GLOSSARY
TECHNICAL TERMINOLOGY ABBREVIATIONS
CDP — Customer Data Programming
Software Terminology
Button — A rectangular area that represents an CDS — Customer Defined Statement
option or reply.
ECU — Electronic Control Unit
Display Screen — A screen that displays
information. EECU — Engine Electronic Control Unit

Entry Form — A screen, or portion of a screen, EHT — Electronic Hand Throttle

with one or more areas to be filled in by the user.
These areas are called fields. EUP — Electronic Unit Pump

Message Box — A box (containing a message) MDP — MACK Data Programming

that appears on the screen, as needed.
PC — Personal Computer
Menu — A screen, or portion of a screen,
containing a list of items that can be selected. PSP — Product Software Programming

Screen Status Line — An area located on the PTO — Power Take-Off

bottom of the screen that displays relevant
information. RAM — Random Access Memory

Selection Screen — A screen where the user SD — Service Diagnostics

can select items or settings.
SSC — Single Speed Control
Programming Security Screen — A security
control screen that requires entering a password VECU — Vehicle Electronic Control Unit
to gain access to certain programming options. If
a valid password is not entered, the user will not V.I.P.™ — Vehicle Information Profiler
be allowed to continue programming the selected
option. V-MAC — Vehicle Management and Control
System

VSC — Variable Speed Control

Page 170
FEATURE INDEX

FEATURE INDEX

Page 171
 FEATURE INDEX
A Cruise Control
Access P Accel Bump Speed .................................. 87
% Mechanic Power Limit ......................... 104 Autoresume with Clutch .......................... 87
Access S Bump Speed ............................................ 88
Mechanic Road Speed Limit .................... 105 Decel Bump Speed .................................. 88
Access T Engagement/Dropout Requirements ....... 90
Distance Before Shutdown ...................... 104 Hold to Nearest ........................................ 88
Distance Remaining After Shutdown Cruise Control Mode ....................................... 87
Lamp ON .................................... 104 Cruise Max Road Speed ................................ 88
Time Before Shutdown ............................ 104 Cruise Min Road Speed ................................. 88
Active Faults While Monitoring List ................. 35 Cruise Switch Disables Super 10 Top 2 ......... 78
Adaptive Cruise Control ..................................... 25, 42 Custom Cruise Control ................................... 87
Advance to Next Trip via Display ................... 105 Custom EHT Control Enabled ......................... 90
Air Conditioning Installed Option ..................... 102 Custom Parameters ....................................... 116
Air Conditioning Override Time ...................... 99 Customer Data EECU Features ...................... 99
Air Suspension Customer Defined Labels ............................... 120
Air Suspension Active Dashboard Alert.... 77 Customer Torque Limit Gear Ratio ................. 74
Air Suspension Polarity............................. 77 Customer Torque Limit.................................... 74
Road Speed Limit When Air Suspension Cylinder Balance Test ..................................... 37
Active ........................................................ 77 Cylinder Cut-Out Test ..................................... 37
Enable Air Suspension Speed Interlock ... 77
D
Air Temp. Fan Engagement Threshold .......... 99
Datalink Connection Message......................... 12
Alert Blackout Start Time ................................ 114
Data Save Mode ............................................ 113
Alert Blackout Stop Time ................................ 114
Default Display Settings .................................. 37
Allow Fan Override When Moving .................. 86
Delay Engine Brake Application in Cruise ...... 76
Allow Fan Override When Parked .................. 86
Demand Driver ID to Operate ......................... 103
Alternator High Voltage Fault Threshold ........ 73
Demand ID to Continue Running Beyond
Alternator Low Voltage Fault Threshold ......... 72
30 Seconds ................................................. 104
Ambient Air Temperature Option Shutdown.... 82
Detect Loss of Signal from MPH Sensor ........ 73
Maximum Ambient Air............................... 83
Determining Actual Fuel Consumed................ 121
Minimum Ambient Air................................ 82
Disable Cruise Control .................................... 87
Automatic Transmission Temperature
Display and Trip Settings ................................ 105
Warning and Shutdown ............................... 79
Display Screen Snapshots
Autoset, EHT ................................................... 90
Capturing Snapshots ............................... 35
B Printing Snapshots ................................... 40
Battery Low Voltage Fault Threshold ............. 72 Viewing Snapshots .................................. 43
Blackout Mode Enabled ................................. 114 Display Settings
Clearing Current Selections ..................... 36
C Saving Default Selections ........................ 41
Cab Fan Controls ............................................ 86 Display Trip Information on V.I.P.™ ............... 106
Calibrate Throttle Pedal................................... 27, 35 Distance Before Shutdown.............................. 104
Calibrate Throttle Pedal, Cummins ................. 34 Distance Remaining After Shutdown
Capturing Display Screen Snapshots.............. 35 Lamp On ...................................................... 104
Carrier Ratio ................................................... 71 Downloading the Product Software File ......... 154
Changing Engine Idle Speed .......................... 35 Downloading the Product Software
Changing Governor Type ............................... 36 V.I.P.™ File .................................................. 154
Changing the ECU Part Number .................... 153 Downloading the Reprogramming
Chassis DYNO Mode ..................................... 136 Data File ...................................................... 154
Clearing Current Selections ............................ 136 Driver Event Exception Triggers
Clearing Fault Tables ..................................... 136 Company Limit Engine Speed ................. 117
Coolant Level Shutdown ................................ 79 Fueled Engine Speed .............................. 117
Coolant Temperature Shutdown .................... 79 Fueled Vehicle Overspeed ...................... 117
Coolant Temperature Fan Engagement PTO 1 Engaged ....................................... 117
Threshold .................................................... 99

Page 172
 FEATURE INDEX
PTO 2 Engaged ........................................117 Viewing Active Faults ...............................42
Severe Engine Speed ..............................117 Viewing Fault Tables ................................43
Vehicle Overspeed, All Conditions ...........118 Fault Monitoring During Live Parameter
Driver Event Summary List .............................118 Monitoring..................................................38
Driver Event Summary Time ...........................116 Fault Reporter ..................................................38
Driver ID Settings ............................................120 Fault Reporter Advanced Setup ......................39
Driver Incentive Fault Reporter Configuration ..........................39
Driver Incentive .........................................111 Fleet Data ........................................................103
Fleet Fuel Economy Penalty Threshold ....112 Fleet Fuel Economy Target ............................110
Incentive Increase in Cruise Max Speed...89 Fuel Calibration ...............................................103
Incentive Increase in Road Speed Limit....75 Fuel Economy Type ........................................78
Incentive/Penalty Fuel Economy Fuel Temperature Sensor Applied ..................100
Sample Size ...........................................113
Incentive-to-Base Hysteresis.....................112 G
Penalty-to-Base Hysteresis .......................112 GuardDog™ Enabled .....................................110
Penalty Decrease in Cruise Max Speed....89 GuardDog™Low Fuel Level Warning
Penalty Decrease in Road Speed Limit.....75 Threshold % .................................................110
Speed Limit Adjustment Rate....................76 H
Driver Reset Maintenance Items Hand Throttle
via V.I.P.™ ..................................................106 Accel Bump Speed ...................................91
Driveshaft PTO Dropout Enabled ...................100 Accel Ramp Rate .....................................92
Driveshaft PTO Dropout Threshold ................100 Autoset .....................................................90
Driveshaft PTO 2 Option .................................85 Decel Bump Speed ..................................91
E Decel Ramp Rate .....................................92
Edit Owner Storage ........................................70 Dropout Above Maximum Speed .............91
Electronic Hand Throttle SSC RPM ................91 EHT SSC RPM..........................................91
Enable Cruise Button Bonus............................73 Enable Custom EHT Control .....................90
Enable if Fault Incorrect Gear Ratio ................75 Engagement/Dropout Requirements ........93
Enable Sleep Mode Alert .................................77 Engine Speed Limit ..................................92
Enable Torque Limit with PTO .........................74 Hold to Minimum Speed ...........................91
Engage Fan with Engine Brake ......................86 Hold to Nearest ........................................91
Engage Fan with PTO ON ..............................87 Jump to Min Speed ..................................90
Engine Brake Disengagement in Cruise..........73 Max Road Speed ......................................92
Engine Brake Engagement Delay in Cruise ....73 Max Set Speed .........................................92
Engine Brake Installed ....................................101 Min Set Speed ..........................................92
Engine Brake Test ...........................................37 Ramp Rate ...............................................93
Engine Compression Test ...............................38 Single Speed Control (SSC) .....................90
Engine Load Threshold for No Hard Braking Threshold ..................................115
MPH Signal ..................................................72 High Idle Engine Speed ..................................99
Engine Overspeed Fault Threshold ................78 Hold Electrical Power ON Until Vehicle
Engine Overspeed Logging (Severe) .............115 Stopped .......................................................76
Engine Overspeed Logging with Fuel .............115 I
Engine Overspeed, Company Limit ................114 Idle Cooldown Feature Enabled ......................80
Engine Run-Up Test ........................................38 Idle Data Type on V.I.P.™ ..............................113
Engine Sleep Mode ........................................99 Idle Logging Delay ..........................................115
Exhaust Brake Installed ..................................101 Idle Shutdown ..................................................80
Exhaust Temperature Shutdown .....................80 Idle Shutdown if Hand Throttle Control
F Active ...........................................................81
Failed MPH Sensor Engine Power Limit .........72 Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode ...................81
Fan Override Time When Moving ...................101 Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode with
Fault Codes PTO 4 Fast Idle ...........................................82
Clearing Fault Tables ...............................36 Idle Shutdown if % Load Used Higher Than
Printing Fault Tables ................................40 Threshold .....................................................81
Idle Shutdown if PTO Active ...........................81

Page 173
 FEATURE INDEX
Idle Shutdown if Single Speed Control O
Active .......................................................... 81 Oil Level Sensor Available ............................. 100
Idle Shutdown % Load Threshold .................. 81 Oil Pressure Shutdown ................................... 79
Idle Shutdown Timer ...................................... 83 Oil Temperature Sensor Available ................. 101
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Temperature ........... 83 Output Boost Pressure on J1587 ................... 100
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer ...................... 83
Idle Shutdown Warning Time ......................... 84 P
Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings ......... 118 Parameter Monitoring
Incident Log Active Faults While Monitoring List .......... 35
Incident Log Engine Speed Decrease Clearing Current Selections ..................... 36
Trigger Threshold .................................. 118 Fault Monitoring ....................................... 38
Incident Log Engine Speed Filter.............. 119 Live Monitoring ........................................ 39
Incident Log Engine Speed Increase Paused Monitoring ................................... 40
Trigger Threshold .................................. 118 Saving Default Selections ........................ 41
Incident Log Recording Rate .................... 119 Parameter Selection
Incident Log Trigger Sample Time............ 119 Using Default Selections .......................... 39
Incident Log Vehicle Acceleration Using SAE Parameter Menu .................... 39
Trigger ................................................... 118 Predictive Oil Change...................................... 40
Incident Log Vehicle Deceleration Print Current Parameters ............................... 70
Trigger ................................................... 119 Printing Display Screen Snapshots ................. 40
Incident Log Vehicle Speed Decrease Printing Fault Tables ....................................... 40
Trigger Threshold .................................. 118 Programming Options via V.I.P.™ ................ 107
Incident Log Vehicle Speed Filter ............. 119 Programming (Flash) the Product Software
Incident Log Vehicle Speed Increase File .............................................................. 155
Trigger Threshold .................................. 118 Programming the Reprogramming
Inhibit Cruise Control with PTO ON ................ 84 Data File ...................................................... 152
Initial Set using Resume Switch ..................... 85 PTO Speed Control Settings
Accel Bump Speed (Custom) ................... 96
L Accel Ramp Rate (Custom) ...................... 97
Length of Driver Trip Code ............................. 114 Autoset (Custom) ...................................... 95
Limit Power if Electrical Fault from Decel Bump Speed (Custom) ................... 96
MPH Sensor ................................................ 74 Decel Ramp Rate (Custom)...................... 97
Limit Power if No Signal from Dropout Above Maximum Speed
MPH Sensor ................................................ 74 (Custom) ...................................... 96
Limited Power Mode Engagement/Dropout Requirements
% Power Limit if No ID Entered ............... 103 (Custom) ...................................... 98
Limited Time Mode Engine Speed Limit .................................. 94
% Power Limit Before Shutdown ............. 104 Hold to Minimum Speed (Custom)............ 96
Low Idle Speed Adjust with Switches ............. 76 Hold to Nearest (Custom) ......................... 97
Lower Gear Road Speed Limit ....................... 72 Jump to Minimum Speed (Custom) .......... 95
Lower Gear Road Speed Limit Option ........... 76 Max Road Speed Dropout ....................... 94
Max Set Speed ........................................ 94
M
Min Set Speed ......................................... 94
MACK PowerLeash™ Engine Brake
Park Brake Check to Enable PTO ........... 93
Installed........................................................ 101
Preset Speed ........................................... 94
Maintenance Broadcast Schedule .................. 114
Ramp Rate ............................................... 94
Maintenance Data Log
Road Speed Limit ..................................... 95
Resetting the Maintenance Data Log ...... 41
Single Speed Control (SSC) .................... 93
Saving the Maintenance Data Log ........... 41
Viewing the Maintenance Data Log ......... 43 R
Maintenance Monitor Schedule ...................... 70 Re-Entering Customer Passwords ................. 152
Mechanic Power Limit % ................................. 104 Removing Fuses ............................................ 152
Mechanic Road Speed Limit ........................... 105 Request Driver Name at Every Startup? ........ 113
Reset DataMax via V.I.P.™ ............................ 105
N
Reset Driver Trip via V.I.P.™ ......................... 106
Number of ID Attempts ................................... 103

Page 174
 FEATURE INDEX
Reset Predictive Oil Change via Override U
Switch ...........................................................109 Unit ID Number ...............................................71
Resetting the Maintenance Data Log ..............41 Unit Pump Calibration......................................70
Resetting the Vehicle Data Log .......................41 Uploading the Verification File ........................154
Road Speed Limit ........................................... 71 Using the F3 Update Options Screen .............153
Road Speed Pickup Teeth ..............................71 Utilities .............................................................70
S V
Saving Customer Data ....................................152 Vehicle Component Parameters......................71
Saving Parameter Defaults ..............................41 Vehicle Data Log
Saving Vehicle Data Log .................................41 Resetting the Vehicle Data Log ................41
Selecting Datalink Adapter ..............................41 Saving the Vehicle Data Log ....................41
Service Brake Fault Threshold with Viewing the Vehicle Data Log ..................44
Engine Brake ...............................................78 Vehicle Display Type ......................................105
Set Time and Date ..........................................70 Vehicle Overspeed Logging with Fuel ............115
Set/Resume Fault Diagnostic .........................85 Vehicle Overspeed Logging, All Conditions ....115
Set/Resume Switch State ...............................84 View Current Parameters ...............................70
Shutdown Options ...........................................79 Viewing Adaptive Cruise Control .....................42
Single Press of Resume to Accelerate ...........84 Viewing Configuration Information ..................43
Smart Fan Type Installed ................................100 Viewing Programming Histories ......................43
Source of Driver Name for Trip .......................113 Viewing the Switch Status Display...................44
Sweet Spot Indicator on V.I.P.™ .....................106 Vocational Features.........................................84
Switch Assignments ........................................85 VTG Vane Position Calibration ........................31, 42
Switch Status Display .....................................23
W
T Wiggle Wire Test .............................................45
Theft Deterrence Features...............................103 Write Report at Next Driver..............................116
Time Before Shutdown ....................................104 Write Report at Next Trip/Trip Reset ..............116
Tire Size ..........................................................71 Write Report Once per Day ............................116
Torque Limit Ramp-Up Time ...........................74 Write Report When Key Turned ON ...............116
Torque Limit with PTO ....................................74
Traction Loss Threshold .................................115
Transmission Temperature .............................80
Transmission Top Gear Ratio .........................71
Trigger Settings, Driver Events ........................116

Page 175
 NOTES

Page 176